SHOP PRACTICES

& SPARE PARTS

10/11

SPM 11 EN.indb 1 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Contents
2010/2011 Shop Practices Manual
Binding 1 The 2010/2011 Shop Practices Manual is published
Alpine Binding Liability Indemnification 4 by Salomon for Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding
Binding Quick Reference Chart 6 Dealers. This manual provides current technical
Retail Binding information, certification requirements, and indem-
Systems 7 nification information. Please keep a copy of this
Preparation 7 Manual on hand as a quick, easy, and reliable refer-
Installation 8 ence for servicing Salomon alpine bindings. Because
Binding-to-Boot Adjustments 14 the content of the Manual changes every year, you
Release Value Selection & Adjustment 15 should keep previous editions available as refer-
Final Checking & Visual Inspection 17 ences for servicing older products. Your Salomon
Mechanical Inspection 18 Certification Web site will one day provide a resource
Skier Instruction, Warning & Record Keeping 20 of archived material for your reference as well.
Rental & DEMO Binding Systems 22 Salomon continues to be the number one winter
Preparation 22 sports brand worldwide. Our goal is to advance our
Installation 23
breakthrough technologies featuring innovation in
Binding-to-Boot AdJustments 24
safety and performance binding systems.
Release Value Selection & Adjustment 25
Rental Visual & Mechanical Inspection 25
Skier Instruction, Warning & Record Keeping 29

Binding Maintenance
& Repair 32
Maintenance & Repair 32

Certification Program 34
Technician Certification Exam 34

ALPINE SKI 38
Technical Features 39
Maintenance & Repairs 43

Boot 47
Standard Boot Norms 47
Technical Features 48
Salomon Foot Measurer 49
Advanced Fit Technology Liner 50
Custom Shell technology 52
Salomon Boot Technologies 54
Boot Concepts 55
Foot Anatomy And Fit 63

Helmet & Pole 66

Helmet Technology 67
Pole Technonolgy 69

Spare Parts 70 Cover Photo

Photographer: Scott Markewitz.
Warranty 85 Skier: Rick Armstrong.

Rev. 01 - 101007

SPM 11 EN.indb 2 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding
Technical reference for the
complete line of current
Salomon alpine bindings
Photo: Adam Clark. Skier: Cody Townsend

SPM 11 EN.indb 1 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding
2010/2011 Certification program
Salomon provides its Authorized Alpine Binding Dealers with information contained in this publication:
1. To help assure skiers that Salomon alpine
bindings are properly selected, mounted,
adjusted, and serviced.
Authorized Alpine Dealer Requirements
While it is not necessary for an Authorized Location to have all of its
personnel certified, sales people and managers are encouraged to remain
aware of Salomon’s certification and record keeping requirements.
• Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding Dealers must have at least one
Salomon Certified Technician working at each Authorized Location sell-
ing, servicing or renting Salomon alpine bindings.
• The technician who signs the Authorized Location’s workshop or rental
form for any transaction must be currently Salomon alpine binding cer-
tified.
• It is an Authorized Dealer’s responsibility to maintain sufficient records
to identify its Certified Technicians.
2010/2011 Certification Kit
This manual forms part of a kit which is available each year to Salomon
Authorized Binding Dealers. Enclosed in the kit you will find the neces-
sary materials to certify your shop technicians for mounting and adjusting
Salomon Bindings for the 2010/2011 season. This packet should have the
following items:
• 2010/2011 Salomon Shop Practices Manual & Spare Parts
• 2010/2011 Salomon Shop Practices CD (instructional video & manuals)
• Skier Classification Chart
• Visual Indicator Adjustment Chart
• Toe Height Adjustment Card
If this packet is missing any of these items, or you need any more, please
contact Salomon Customer Service at 1 (800) 654-2668 (in the U.S.) or
1 (800) 361-3398 (in Canada).
Electronic Documentation
An electronic version of the 2010/2011 Shop Practices Manual is
available both on the media CD included with this Certification Kit
as well as online at www.salomoncertification.com (in the U.S.) or
www.salomonhookup.ca (in Canada). The media CD PDF version of the
manual is identical to the printed copy included in this kit, with the added
convenience of a fully hyperlinked table of contents and reference boxes
for easy navigation. The online PDF version of the Salomon Shop Practices
Manual is continuously updated with the most current technical language
and thus may have additions not appearing in the print version of the
Salomon SPM. The printed version of the Salomon SPM is still completely
valid and all procedures described within follow industry standards.
SPM 11 EN.indb 2
Introduction > 2
2. To serve as a risk management tool for the
Authorized Dealer.
Certification Fees
Authorized Alpine Binding Dealers will be invoiced an administrative reg-
istration fee for technician certifications.
U.S. Dealers
• For the U.S., a $12 fee will be invoiced for each Registration and Exam
submitted on line at www.salomoncertification.com
• The U.S. fee is $20 for each Registration/ Exam submitted by mail or
fax to Salomon, or for technicians certified by any approved industry
training program.
Fax: (801) 334-4502
Salomon Certification/Customer Service
Salomon U.S.A.
2030 Lincoln Ave.
Ogden, UT 84401
Canadian Dealers
• For Canada, a $30.00 fee will be invoiced for each Certification Kit sent
to the dealer. Technicians must Register and take the Exam on-line at
www.salomonhookup.ca
Media CD
The training video comes on a cross-platform CD-ROM
(Windows, Mac & Linux) along with a fully indexed PDF
of the Shop Practices Manual and several forms for
convenient access, duplication and printing.
To view the videos you’ll need a computer with
any web browser with the Quicktime plug-in
installed (if it is not already installed, your browser
will provide a link to easily obtain the free software).
In addition, to view the Shop Practices document and open the other forms
you’ll need a PDF document reader such as the free Adobe Reader (available at
http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html)
Insert the CD into a computer, navigate to the top-level of the CD-ROM and dou-
ble-click the “WELCOME-BIENVENUE.html” file – this should open the file in your
internet web browser. Alternately, with the disk in the computer, you can launch a
new internet browser window, choose “Open” from the “File” menu of the brows-
er and navigating to location of the file on the CD-ROM.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
 Binding Introduction > 3

2010/2011 Certification program continued

2010/2011 Salomon Certified Technician Certification Process
Only a technician sponsored by a Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding Dealer may be certified. Authorized Dealers can log onto
www.salomoncertification.com (in the U.S.) or www.salomonhookup.ca (in Canada) to receive a current list of their Salomon
Certified Technicians. To complete the technician certification process:
1. Read this manual and become familiar with required Salomon shop 3. Be familiar with Salomon bindings through hands-on experience.
practices. A corresponding CD is available to assist in this process. For
4. For the U.S., log on to www.salomoncertification.com. For Canada,
a copy of the CD, contact your Salomon sales or Customer Satisfaction
log on to www.salomonhookup.ca. Complete the on-line 2010/2011
Representative.
Salomon Certified Technician Registration and Exam and receive confir-
2. Be familiar with earlier editions of Salomon Shop Practices Manuals mation of your certification instantly.
and Salomon Technical Updates.

Technician Certification Validity Period and Transfer

• Technician certification is valid for two years from the exam date • Technician certification may be transferred from one
(unless Salomon provides further notice). Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding Dealer to another by
• Technician certification is not valid at a location that is not a contacting the certification coordinator by mail or telephone
Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding Location. (Ogden, UT for U.S. dealers and Markham for Canadian dealers).

Instructions For Taking The On-line Exam

Once you have become familiar with the procedures for mounting, adjusting, and testing Salomon bindings, take the exam on-line for instant results
and obtain your certificate immediately. (If for some reason you are unable to take the test on line, please contact your Salomon sales representative.)
Just follow these easy steps:

1. Log onto the certification website
• In the U.S. log onto www.salomoncertification.com
• In Canada log onto www.salomonhookup.ca
2. Register your information
• Once you have signed in, you will get a prompt asking you to confirm
your login-ID. Write this information down in case you need to stop
your test in the middle and return later.
3. Take the on-line exam
• Once the test begins, do not use your web browser to move “back”
or “forward”. Doing this will result in a cancelled session and you
will need to start at the beginning.
• A score of 90%, or 23 correct answers, must be obtained to pass.
• In addition, questions 12 to 25 are considered core questions and
must be answered correctly.
4. Once you pass the test
• In the U.S. click on the button to create a printable certificate. (The
certificate will be created in Acrobat. If you do not have Acrobat
Reader on your computer, click on the icon, and you can download it
free from the web.) OR Write down your certificate number and return
later to retrieve your printable certificate. An invoice for $12 will be
generated and sent to your shop. If you do not pass, your shop will
not be invoiced. Only passing exams will receive certificate numbers
and generate an invoice.
• In Canada, click on the Download Certificate box to create a print-
able certificate. (The certificate will be created in Acrobat. If you do
not have Acrobat Reader on your computer, click on the icon and you
can download it free from the web.) OR click on e-mail Certificate to
receive an e-mail version.

Finding Currently Certified Technicians For Your Shop

Finding currently certified technicians is a service only available the U.S.
1. Simply log onto the site and click on the button “Search for certified
technicians”.
2. Enter your shop ship-to code or certificate number to search the certi-
fication database.
3. You may retrieve printable certificates from the database for any certi-
fied tech.
4. If you need to know who in your shop is certified, log on and search
for certified technicians for your shop. An updated list will appear so
you have constant access to the information.

SPM 11 EN.indb 3 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding Indemnification > 4

Alpine Binding Liability Indemnification

Schedule of indemnified bindings
Salomon alpine binding indemnification applies to the 2010/2011 Retail Binding Line, 2010/2011 Rental
Binding Line, Non-current Retail Binding Line and Non-current Rental Binding Line models listed below.
Indemnification does not apply to older non-indemnified binding models.
Non-Indemnified Bindings
Older models of Salomon bindings no longer on the Schedule of Indemnified Bindings may still be serviced, however Liability Indemnification will not
be offered by Salomon for these models of bind­ings. Dealers wishing to service these models of bindings can reduce their liability risk by requiring an
additional waiver and release agreement and attaching it to the Workshop Form. Such waivers should be reviewed by a dealer’s own legal counsel to
ensure compliance with applicable laws.
Salomon bindings are not designed or tested for use with Mono Boards, therefore bindings mounted on Monoboards will not be indemnified.

Retail Binding Line

2010/2011 Non Current S914 FIS 26.3/20/17 S910 FIS 24 S710 Cp 607
STH 16 C610 Cp S914 FIS S910 T S710 Ti C509 D+
STH 16 Steel C610 S914 Pe2 S910 S710 S305 GROM
STH 14 Driver C609 Ti S914 S910 T Ps S710 Pilot C305 GROM
STH 14 C609 D+ S914 FIS Pilot S910 T Axe+ S710 SC Pilot C305 MINI GROM
STH 12 Oversized C609 S914 Pilot S812 Pa S710 Ti Pilot 305
STH 12 Driver C608 FIS 17 914 F1S 20 S811 PS S710 Ti Cp2 Z 12 Ti Smartrak
Z 14 C608 Cp 914 FIS S810 Ti S710 Pa Control
Z 12 C608 914 S810 Ti Axe+ S710 DP STH 12
Z 12 Ti C607 S912 Ti Pe2 S810 Cp S710 CP2 Z 10 Smartrak Control
Z 11 C509 Dr+ S912 FIS S810 Ps 710 Smartrak Grip Z 10 Ti Axe +
Z 10 C509 S912 FIS 24 S810 710 Z 10 Ti
Z 10 Ti C305 / C305 MINI S912 Ti S810 Ti Pilot C610 CP2 Z 10 FIS 20
Z 10 Women Z 920 Lab S912 Ps S810 Pilot 610 CP LZ 9
Z 10 Ti Women Z 916 Lab S912 FIS Pilot S810 Ti SC Pilot 610 LZ 8
L10 Z 914 Lab S912 Ti Pilot S810 Ti Ps 609 D+ LZ 7
L10 Jr N 920 Equipe Race S912 Ti SC Pilot S711 Ps 609 TZ 5
L9 N 916 Equipe Comp. S912 S711 Pa S608 CP
L7 S914 Axe+ S910 T FIS 26,3/24/20 S711 Cp C608 CP2
T5 S914 Lab S910 T Ps 711 608

Rental Binding Line

2010/2011 Non Current Q7 SC Q500 SC Quadrax 3 SR KRR TZ 5 SC
Q7 SR Q500 SR Q3 SC TZ 5 SR
KR Z 12 S912 Ti SC
ST610 e2 Quadrax 5 SR Q3 SR TZ 5 SC
KR Z 11 S810 Ti SC
C609 SC Q5 SR KRR Z 12 Ti TZ 5 SC Junior Track
KR Z 10 712 e2
609 SC Snowtrip ST 410 KRR Z 12
KR Z 10 W Cosmic S712 SC
609 SR Q400 SR Z 12 Ti Smartrak
Z 12 SC KRR 711
C608 SR C305 SR Z 12 Ti Smartrak
Z 10 SC 711 SC
C608 SC 305 SC Control
L 10 SC 710 e2
608 SC 305 SR Z 12 Ti SC
L 10 SR 710 SC
C607 SC S305 SC KRR Z 10
L 9 W SC Cosmic S710 SR
C607 SR S305 Grom SC Z 10 Ti SC
L 7 SC Cosmic S710 SC
607 SR C305 Grom SR Z 10 Smartrak
L 7 SR Cosmic S710
Quadrax 6 SC Q300 SC LZ 8 SC
T 5 SC Q700 SC
C509 SR Q300 SR LZ 7 SR
T 5 SR S700 SR
C509 SC S300 SC
S700 SC Drive Plus
Q500 SC Drive Plus Quadrax 3 SC
S700 SC

SPM 11 EN.indb 4 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding Indemnification > 5

Alpine Binding Liability Indemnification continued

Salomon Authorized Dealers
Salomon offers liability indemnification to Salomon Authorized Dealers. Salomon will to the extent and
within the limits that insurance coverage is available defend and indemnify a Salomon Authorized Alpine
Binding Dealer against liabilities from claims presented by any customer of the Authorized Dealer arising
solely from the use of Salomon alpine bindings, provided:
A. The dealer purchased the alpine bindings from Salomon. H. The dealer provides written documentation of the ­technician’s employ-
B. The dealer has received written notice of a claim involving alpine bind- ment and training (e.g., method of training, proof of certification, etc.).
ings. I. A copy of the properly completed workshop form or rental form, in-
C. The claim alleges use of the alpine bindings resulted in injury. cluding a signed release, is submitted.
D. All Salomon recommendations, procedures and policies in effect at the J. A properly completed Post Accident Ski Equipment Inspection Report,
time of the incident were followed, including, but not limited to, those the same as or equivalent to the exemplary form displayed in this
contained in the Salomon Shop Practices Manual, Salomon Technical manual, is submitted.
Update (if applicable), Salomon Purchaser Policies and Salomon K. Any other helpful information such as a Ski Patrol Incident Report
General Terms & Conditions. Form is submitted.
E. The Certified Technician is of legal age. L. The dealer notifies Salomon in writing within ten days of the date on
F. The dealer uses workshop and/or rental forms the same as, or equiva- which the dealer first receives written notice of the claim.
lent to, Salomon forms with currently approved Liability Release M. The dealer cooperates fully in the investigation, litigation and/or settle-
Language. ment of the claim.
G. The dealer maintains proper and complete records for all Salomon Salomon may terminate indemnification, with respect to Salomon
bindings mounted and/or adjusted for a period of two years or the alpine bindings, upon providing written notice to the dealer.
statute of limitations of the state or province, whichever is longer.

Legal Claims
In the event a Salomon equipment user or anyone acting upon the equipment user’s behalf contacts the
Authorized Dealer regarding a potential claim:
1. U se your best efforts to determine the exact nature and details of the 4. Gather all information and documents required by Salomon listed in
claim. the Liability Indemnification section for that specific product and send
2. Avoid expressing opinions concerning the claim. You may, to the the documents with a brief description of the incident to:
extent that you have complied with all ­recommended procedures,
indicate to the claimant or the claimant’s representative that recom- U.S.A. Canada
mended procedures for service and adjustment of the equipment were Alpine Legal Claims Legal Claims Department
followed. Department, Salomon Canada Sports
3. Notify your insurance company. Salomon indemnification is not a sub- Salomon U.S.A., 2700 14th Ave Unit 1-4
stitute for liability insurance. 2030 Lincoln Ave., Markham, On L3R 0J1
Ogden, UT 84401.

SPM 11 EN.indb 5 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding 6

Binding Quick Reference Chart

Jig Selecion Adj. Wing
Drill Bit Selection Skier Weight
(given ski width) Range Adj.

(E) Elastic pedal / (S) Stomp pedal

SCP (Salomon Control Pedal)

High Lateral Transmission

Vertical Progressive Pivot
(skis with no metal) (Ref. #)

Ski/Binding Interface
80 mm - 123 mm (Ref. #)

Adult / Junior Norms

70 mm - 116 mm (Ref. #)

Micro Simultaneous
(skis with metal) (Ref. #)
56 mm - 99 mm (Ref. #)

Weight 1/2 pair (g)

Removable Brake
4.1 mm diameter

3.6 mm diameter

Height (mm)
Drill Bit Length

Automatic
DIN Scale

US Size

Ti Line
Brakes

(mm)
lbs
kg
RETAIL
À La Carte Models
N STH16 102972 R90/R100/R115/R130 9.5 9-16 17.5 > 95 > 209 19 2.5 1161 S S A • •
N STH14 Driver 110723 R90/R100/R115 9.5 6-14 17.5 58-130 127-286 19 2.5 1060 S S A • •
N STH14 102975 R90/R100/R115/R130 9.5 6-14 17.5 58-130 127-286 19 2.5 1025 A V S A • •
N STH12 Oversized 110601 R80/R90/R100/R115 9.5 4-12 17.5 42-120 92-264 19 2.5 1025 A V S A • •
Drill Bit Ref. # 000893

Drill Bit Ref. # 000892

Jig Ref. # 001156

Jig Ref. # 001157

N L10 110604 B80 9.5 3-10 16.5 30-107 66-235 28 3.5 860 A E A •
N L9 108044 B80 9.5 2,5-9 16.5 25-100 55-220 28 3.5 861 A E A •
N Z14 110583 B75/B80 9.5 6-14 16.5 58-130 127-286 28 3.5 1050 A V • A • •
N Z12 110599 B80/B90/B100 9.5 4-12 16.5 42-120 94-264 28 3.5 1050 A V • A • •
N Z12 Ti 110453 B80/B90/B100 9.5 4-12 16.5 42-120 92-264 28 3.5 937 A V • A Ti • •
N Z11 110602 B80/B90 9.5 3,5-11 16.5 36-115 79-253 28 3.5 970 A V • A • •
N Z10 110603 B80/B90 9.5 3-10 16.5 30-107 66-235 28 3.5 970 A V • A • •
N Z10 Ti W 892976 B80/B90 9.5 3-10 16.5 30-107 66-235 28 3.5 857 A V • A Ti • •

Junior
N L7 111617 / 111623 B80 001156 001157 8.0 2-7,5 16.5 22-85 55-187 28 3.5 861 A E A&J •
# 000813

# 000814

N T5 111639 / 111619 NS 784061 8.0 0,5-4,5 14 10-45max 22-100 44 5.5 561 A E A&J •
N T5 Juniortrack 111641 NS 247290 8.0 0,5-4,5 22 10-45max 22-100 104 13 681 A E A&J Junior Track •

Bindings For Sets

K Z14 120025 B75 9.5 6-14 23 58-130 127-286 100 15 1370 A V • A Smartrak • •
K Z12 108772 / 108785 B75/B80/B90 9.5 4-12 31.5 42-120 92-264 120 15 1310 A V • A Smartrak • •
# 788403

K Z11 110671 B80 9.5 3,5-11 16.5 36-115 79-253 120 3.5 1305 A V • A Smartrak • •
J Z11 120026 B75 9.5 3,5-11 16.5 36-115 79-253 120 3.5 1157 A V • A Smartrak • •
# 000893

# 000892

K Z10 110672 / 110673 B80 9.5 3-10 31.5 30-107 66-235 120 15 1305 A V • A Smartrak • •
K Z10 Ti 102174 / 110677 B80 9.5 3-10 31.5 30-107 66-235 120 15 1030 A V • A Smartrak Ti • •
J L10 110674 B80 9.5 3-10 31.5 30-107 66-235 120 15 950 A E A •
001156

001157

J L9 102192 / 104442 B80 9.5 2,5-9 31.5 25-100 55-220 120 15 950 A E A •
J L10 Jr 111300 B80 9.5 3-10 31.5 30-107 66-235 80 10 950 A E A •

RENTAL
Smartrak Rental
KR Z12 110605 B80/B90 9.5 4-12 31.5 42-120 92-264 120 15 1310 A V • A Synchro-Center • •
KR Z11 110606 B80/B90 9.5 3,5-11 31.5 36-115 79-253 120 15 1305 A V • A Synchro-Center • •
KR Z10 110607 B80 9.5 3-10 31.5 30-107 66-235 120 15 1305 A V • A Synchro-Center • •
KR Z10 W 110608 B80 9.5 3-10 31.5 30-107 66-235 120 15 1305 A V • A Synchro-Center • •

Bindings For Sets

FR L10 SC 110676 B80 000893 000892 9.5 3-10 31.5 30-107 66-235 122 15 860 A E A Synchro-Center •
# 001003

# 001040

FR L7 SC 111813 B80 8.0 2-7,5 31.5 22-85 55-187 122 15 860 A E A&J Synchro-Center •
# 000813

# 000814

FR T5 SR 111622 NS 8.0 0,5-4,5 14 10-45max 22-100 56 7 572 A E A&J Synchro-Rental •

FR T5 SC 111640 NS 8.0 0,5-4,5 28 10-45max 22-100 86 11 810 A E A&J Synchro-Center •

Adult
NR Z12 SC 110609 B80/B90/B100/B115 9.5 4-12 31.5 42-120 92-264 122 15 1386 A V • A Synchro-Center • •
NR Z10 SC 110610 B80/B90 9.5 3-10 31.5 30-107 66-235 122 15 1370 A V • A Synchro-Center • •
# 001003

# 001040

# 000893

# 000892

NR L10 SC 110612 B80 9.5 3-10 31.5 30-107 66-235 122 15 1100 A E A Synchro-Center •
NR L10 SR 110613 B80 9.5 3-10 18 30-107 66-235 80 10 952 A E A Synchro-Rental •
NR L9 W SC 107279 B80 9.5 2,5-9 31.5 25-100 55_220 122 15 861 A E A Synchro-Center •

Junior
NR L7 SC 111812 B80 8.0 2-7,5 31.5 22-85 55-187 122 15 1100 A E A&J Synchro-Center •
# 001003

# 001040

# 000813

# 000814

NR L7 SR 111618 B80 8.0 2-7,5 18 22-85max 55-187 80 10 958 A E A&J Synchro-Rental •

NR T5 SR 111642 NS 8.0 0,5-4,5 14 10-45max 22-100 56 7 572 A E A&J Synchro-Rental •
NR T5 SC 111643 NS 001003 8.0 0,5-4,5 28 10-45max 22-100 86 11 810 A E A&J Synchro-Center •

SPM 11 EN.indb 6 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding Retail systems > 7

Retail Binding Proper procedures for

a Salomon Certified
Systems Technician to follow
while mounting and
adjusting Salomon
Photo: Dan Carr. Skier: Sammy Carlson.

Retail bindings.

Preparation

S TEP 1
Start out prepared with an efficient working area. Your bench should be the right height, with proper light-
ing, and with the necessary tools at hand. Familiarize yourself with all procedures before you start: being
prepared is the best way to avoid errors and costly mistakes. It is important that all components match
those listed on the workshop form. Refer to your workshop form and make sure the bindings are appropri-
ate for the skier. If the bindings have been used, make sure they are in good condition and no parts are
missing, broken, or showing signs of wear.

Boot-to-Binding Compatibility
Before drilling the ski, be sure the
boot you are using is compatible with
the binding. Only boots that conform
with applicable standards may be
used with Salomon bindings. (See
Standard Boot Sole Dimensions
on page 47 for reference). If a boot
sole is warped, worn or improp­erly
canted, such that there is more than
a 1 mm difference in sole flatness
measured across its width, the boot
is incompatible.
Other Compatibility Problems You
May Encounter
• Cut-outs in the boot sole that
prevent the brake from engaging
properly.
Reference
Page # Section Name
18 Clean vs. Lubricated Test
47 Standard Boot Sole
Dimensions
• E xcessive ramping or wear of the boot soles are: TZ5, S305, C305,
boot sole at the point where it Q300, S300, their mini equivalents,
contacts the binding. Any wear that earlier model indemnified equiva-
inhibits binding function is exces- lents, and their various counter parts.
sive. (The added width of an adult norm
• Tread, grid pattern or insignia boot sole somewhat limits the shock
present in the AFD area of the boot absorption capability of these models
sole. This area must be flat over its and they should not be used with a
entire surface. boot sole longer than 304 mm. As
• Non-compatible boot sole compo- a result, it is recommended that an
sition. Low-grade thermoplastic aggressive junior skier with an adult
(T.P.) boots may not be used with
Salomon bindings. If you are un-
certain as to the quality of the boot Junior Boot To Binding Compatibility Chart
sole material, perform the Clean Junior Boot
vs. Lubricated Test as described Boot Models Norms Bindings Only
Falcon 100 Adult
on page 19. Course 90 Adult
Only adult norm boots may be used Course 80 Adult
with adult bindings. Under no cir- Course 70 Adult
Falcon 60 Junior
cumstances should a junior norm
Performa T3 Adult
boot ever be used with an adult bind- Performa T2 Junior
ing. Salomon bindings that can be 15 Mini Junior
Performa T3 Rental Adult
used with both junior and adult norm
Performa T2 Rental Junior
norm boot sole use a model designed
exclusively for adult norm boots.)
A Salomon toe or heel may not be
mounted with another manufacturer’s
toe or heel. Indemnification and war-
ranty are automatically voided for
such mixed systems.
For Rental specific preparation in-
structions, please refer to page 22.
Junior IMPORTANT:
Salomon bindings that can
be used with both junior
and adult norm boot soles
are: TZ5, S305, C305, Q300,
X
S300, their mini equivalents,
X earlier model indemnified
X
equivalents, and their various
X counter parts.

SPM 11 EN.indb 7 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding Retail Systems > Preparation > 8

Installation
Salomon bindings are installed 3 ways. “À la carte” bindings are installed by drilling holes into the surface
of the ski with the aid of a Salomon jig. Pilot Systems require no jigs and are simply secured to pre-drilled
holes on a premounted Salomon interface. Smartrak Systems can require a combination of these two tech-
niques. Please refer to the specific instructions in this Manual.

Jig Selection & Use

Legend A SD F G H J K
A Handle with Self-Centering Clamps
S Toe Guide
STEP 2

D Tip-of-Boot Sole Indicator

F Locking Lever
G Mid-Sole Indicator
H Boot Size Indicator
J Drill Bit Bushing
K Self-Centering Guide for Heel of Boot

Ref. # Jig Jig range Application

RETAIL JIGS
788403 Smartrak 70mm - 116mm Smartrak binding systems only
56mm - 99mm STH 16,
001156 STH 14, STH 12, STH 14 Driver, Z14, Z12 Ti, Z12, Z12++, Z10 FIS 20, Z10 Ti, Z10 Tiw, 710, 610 CP,
Adult Retail
610, 609 D+, 609 Ti, 609, 608, L 8, L 9; Drill bit length 8 mm: 607, L 7
001157 Wide Adult Retail 80mm - 123mm (Same as above)
78406101 Junior Retail 56mm - 99 mm 305 and 305 Mini, TZ 5
RENTAL JIGS
Synchro Center & Synchro
001003 56mm - 99mm All SC and SR models both Senior & Junior (except TZ 5 Juniortrak)
Rental/ Senior Junior
Wide Synchro Center &
001040 80mm - 123mm All SC and SR models both Senior & Junior (except TZ 5 Juniortrak)
Synchro Rental/ Senior Junior
24729001 TZ 5 Juniortrak Rental 56mm - 99mm TZ 5 Juniortrak bindings only
*Contact your customer service representative for additional jigs.

Jig Use (10 Steps)

A jig ensures that all holes for binding mounting are drilled in the correct location. The bushings guide the
drill bit so that it remains perpendicular to the ski.
S Correct Incorrect
A

1. Select the proper jig for the
binding model to be mount-
ed by referencing the Jig
Reference Guide.
2. Check the skis’ serial number
to ensure you are mounting a
matched pair. Place the skis on
the workbench with the ski tips
pointed to your left.
3. Open the jig by twisting both
handles inward. Place the jig on
the ski.
4. Open the locking lever.
5. Extend the jig to accept the
boot.
6. Place the toe of the boot sole
against the toe guide. Twist the
rear handle to open the rear
clamps and slide the heel guide
snugly against the boot heel.
Fig. A
7. Close the locking lever.
(Compare the mid-sole mark
on the boot with the mid-sole
indicator on the jig. If the mid-
sole mark on the boot and the
mid-sole indicator on the jig
do not agree, use the mid-sole
mark on the boot. This requires
leaving the boot in the jig to
position it on the ski.)
8. Position the jig on the ski.
Fig. S
a. If the ski has a mid-sole mark,
align the mid-sole mark on the
boot with the mid-sole mark on
the ski.
b. If the ski has a tip-of-boot
mark, align the tip-of-boot sole
indicator on the jig with the tip-
of-boot mark on the ski.
c. If the ski has no visible mark-
ings for jig location, consult
the ski manu­facturer for proper
mounting position.
9. Once the jig is in position,
release the handles simultane-
ously and the jig will center
itself on the ski.
10. Re-check your work. The
ski is now ready to be drilled.
(Customers may request that
specific mounting instructions be
followed. This is particularly true
for skiers who want to initiate
turns more easily. Make a note
on the Workshop Form of any of
these special instructions.)
Reference
Page # Section Name
10 4-Hole Toe / Spheric
Oversize
10 3-Hole Toe / Spheric Sport
& Quadrax
23 SC System Demo
23 SR System Rental & Demo

SPM 11 EN.indb 8 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding Retail Systems > Installation > 9

Installation > Drilling, Tapping and Glue

Drilling, Tapping & Glue

Drilling
140–170 cm. The S608 or C608 can
A Correct Incorrect S also be used with skis 120–140 cm.
The S305 Grom and C305 Grom
are generally used with skis 80-140
cm*. The shorter the ski, the more
likely washers will be necessary to
avoid dimpling the ski base.
• The new Salomon C607 junior ac-

S TEP 2
commodates adult norm boot soles
For drilling and tapping Salomon skis, Junior, Teneighty Fish, and Teneighty the base several times with the palm of and offers a 2 to 7 DIN scale. This
please refer to Drill Bit Selection For Kitten skis, drill using either a 3,6 mm your hand to remove any debris from new intermediate binding for 5 to
Salomon Skis (page 40). For other diameter drill bit (for skis under the drilled holes. 10-year-olds features shorter 6 mm
skis, follow the recommendations of 140 cm) or a 4,1 mm diameter drill When mounting thin skis or junior skis screws for use on junior skis as
the ski manufacturer. In their absence, bit for skis greater than or equal to with adult bindings you may need to short as 120 cm.
Salomon suggests that you use the 140 cm. Neither tap nor glue. Use a use shorter screws or add washers to • Whenever junior bindings are
Salomon Drill Bit Selection Guide hand screwdriver only (3 Nm torque) the existing screws between the bind- mounted on adult skis, an increased
(below). When in doubt about the ski’s to tighten the screws on the bindings. ing and the ski to prevent damaging possibility exists of binding pull-out
core composition, select a 3.6 mm Drill through the jig’s proper bush- the ski base. Before drilling any junior due to poor screw reten­tion. The
diameter bit and drill one hole. If the ings applying moderate downward ski, check the screw depth by position- penetration depth of junior screws
bit comes in contact with any metal, pressure on the drill. Verify that the ing the binding over the mounting area into the ski core is only 7 mm. If
re-drill with a 4.1 mm bit to ensure counter­sink bevel on the drill bit has so that the binding screws on one side neces­sary, use adult drill bits and
proper screw retention. Exceptions: properly de-burred the hole. Fig. A of the heel track appear alongside the screws to penetrate any mounting
for Equipe T, XW Fury Junior, Jade After drilling, turn the ski over and hit ski sidewall. Fig. S platform.
Special Cases When Drilling • The hole must be deep enough to
accommodate the screw length you
Salomon Drill Bit Selection Guide Junior Skis
are using or ski damage may result.
• Use a 9.5 mm length drill bit
Skis Diameter Length Ref. Aspect when mounting Z10 Ti, Z10 Ti SC, *EXCEPTION: S305’s and C305’s can-
4.1 mm 8 mm 000813 Z10 SC, Z10, Z10 Fis 20, 710, not be mounted on the Crossmax 10
(ski with metal) 1x5 710 SC, 610, 609, 609 SR, 609 SC, Team or XScream 10 Team models
Junior
3.6 mm 000814 manufactured from 2001 to 2003
(ski with no metal)
8 mm 1x5 608, 608 SC, L 7 SC, L 8, L 8 SC
bindings. These models use the inclusively. Both bindings may be
4.1 mm 000893
9.5 mm same screws as the Salomon adult mounted on the 2004-2005 models
(ski with metal) 1x5
Adult of the Crossmax 10T and Crossmax
3.6 mm 9.5 mm 000892 models and should be drilled and
(ski with no metal) 1x5 tapped accordingly. T, 2006/2007 models of the X Wing T,
Length • As a general rule, the S910 Team is and 2007/2008 X Wing Fury Junior
mounted on skis 170 cm or lon- and Jade Junior.
Diameter
ger and the S608 or C608 on skis

Tapping
Tap all binding mounting holes
A unless otherwise recommended
by the ski manufacturer. Failing
to tap when necessary can result
in topskin delamination, sidewall
delamination, broken screws or
damage to the ski core.
The tap should be mounted into
a brace. Position the brace so the
Glue
Glue must be used when inserting binding screws to:
• Lubricate the screw during insertion. Place a drop of glue on the surface
tap goes straight into the drilled the tap. Each full turn of the brace
hole. Fig. A Apply only enough cuts the tap approximately 2 mm
pressure to the brace to start the into the ski. After tapping, turn the
tap, as the tap is a self-cutting ski over and hit the base several
tool. times with the palm of your hand
A ski mounting plate is usually to remove shavings from the hole.
no more than 8 mm below the
topskin. Tapping any deeper than
8 mm can strip the hole or break Reference
Page # Section Name
8 Jig Selection & Use
10 Retail Mounting
23 Rental & Demo Mounting
PARTS (see page 70)
Reference # Item Name

• Create a watertight seal. of each hole. As the screw passes 000821 Blue Plastic Plugs
• Ensure that the screws will hold through the glue it coats itself. 000818 Black Plastic Plugs
000819 White Plastic Plugs
while the ski is in use by acting as a Caution: Salomon strongly recom-
000822 Grey Plastic Plugs
dampener. mends its own glue for Salomon skis. 000820 Red Plastic Plugs
000823 Orange Plastic Plugs
Mounting 000870 Green Plastic Plugs
000816 Taps
A Posidrive No. 3 screwdriver, not a Phillips, is used to mount Salomon 000817 Tap Brace
bindings. Consult the Salomon Spare Parts Catalog (page 70) for refer- 000811 Glue
ence on the Salomon screws. They are available through your customer 000862 Posidrive Screwdriver
service representative. B18486 (CAN) Posidrive Bit

SPM 11 EN.indb 9 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding Retail Systems > Installation > 10

Installation > General Retail Installation

General Retail Mounting
All Salomon bindings feature tion. Hand check each screw after
A the E-Z Mount System with the mounting.
screws already in place. Position
the component over the pre-
pared holes to begin installation
(Fig. A). If a power screwdriver
is used, adjust the clutch for the
appropriate ski core construc-

Toe Piece
STEP 2

Toe Installation differs for 4-hole toe and 3-hole toe bindings. The former requires a criss-cross screwing pattern while the latter starts with a center
mounting hole sliding track beneath the front of the toe.

S D F

4-hole toe Installation
Performance/Spheric Oversize
A long bit is needed (Posidrive
Bit, CAN. only Ref. #B18486, for
power drills and Salomon Manual
Screwdriver Ref. #000862) to
mount the 4-hole pattern toes as
the front two screws must be in-
serted through the binding hous-
ing. Fig. S
Use a crisscross screwing pattern
and insert each screw until near-
ly seated. Fig. D Do not tighten
until all the screws are in place.
The baseplate of the AFD should
be flush with the topskin of the ski
and each screw should be flush
with the baseplate of the toe piece.
This procedure applies for all toe
pieces with a four-hole pattern.
3-hole toe Installation
Z-concept bindings, Spheric
Sport and Quadrax
For models with a 3-hole pattern,
first pull the center mounting hole
sliding track out from the binding far
enough to insert the screw into the
ski. A long bit is needed (Posidrive
Bit, CAN. only Ref. #B18486, for
power drills and Salomon Manual
Screwdriver Ref. #000862) Fig. F
Tighten the screw until it is firmly
seated. Next, slide the toe piece to-
wards the seated center screw until
the two rear screws align with their
respective holes.
Tighten the rear screws until they
are firmly seated. The base plate
should be flush with the topskin of
the ski and the head of each screw
should be flush with the baseplate.

Heel Piece Ski Brake

Heel Piece Installation Ski Brake Installation
G Place the heel over the prepared
H Do not compress the ski brake
holes and insert the screws using before installing it. Place the two
a crisscross screwing pattern. (Do metal tabs on the front of the
not compress the ski brake before brake into the slots in the heel
it is mounted on the ski.) Fig. G base plate Fig. H. Rotate the rear
Do not over tighten. of the brake downwards to start
the screw in the track. Tighten
screws with a hand screwdriver
(4 Nm maximum).
Legend
Note: The brake can be removed to
facilitate ski maintenance.
To remove it: turn the center screw
counterclockwise and remove
the brake.

Z12 Ti

Reference
Page # Section Name
9 Drilling, Tapping & Glue
S912 Ti 14 Binding-to-Boot
Adjustments
23 SC System Demo
23 SR System Rental & Demo
32 Maintenance and Repairs

PARTS (see page 70)

Heel Track Treadle Spheric Pedal/ Toe Height Adjustment Sliding Center Reference # Item Name

Heel Housing Brake Pedal AFD Adjustment Screw Screw Mounting Hole 000905 Salomon Grease
Heel Lever Pressure Toe Cup Visual Indicator Baseplate Lubrication 000862 Posidrive Screwdriver
Distributors Housing Brake Arm Point* B18486 (CAN) Posidrive Bit
Heel Cup
* Use Salomon grease (Ref. #000905) on track.

SPM 11 EN.indb 10 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding
Installation > Model-specific Installation
Smartrak System
A S
Smartrak System Installation
There are two different mounting procedures for the Smartrack interface, based on the system type.
Smartrack Grip & Grip Plus (fixed
toe systems):
Insert metal band into the recessed
slots in the plate. Fig. A
Determine sole length in mm of
boot.
Identify the letter on the metal
band that corresponds to the boot
sole length. If the boot sole length
is between two numbers, choose
the higher number.e.g.: For a boot
sole of 320mm, choose setting
“334mm D”.
Screw the center mounting slid-
ing track into the correspondingly
lettered hole at the front of the
Smartrak plate. Fig. S
Finish mounting the three hole toe
as usual.
Smartrak Interface Mounting
The Smartrak interface is available
for use with flat skis.
Position the Smartrak metal jig
(ref# 788403) so center mark on
Wide Ski Installation
A S
Wide Ski Jigs are available from
Salomon to mount bindings on
wide skis. Select the proper jig for
the binding to be mounted by refer-
encing the Jig Selection Chart.
Reversible pads adapt fat ski jigs to
different widths of skis. The pads
are changed by pulling them off
SPM 11 EN.indb 11
Retail Systems > Installation > 11
Install the heel unit by lifting the
tab located just in front of the heel
piece and sliding the heel assembly
onto the Smartrak plate. Fig. F
Attach the brake in the usual
manner.
Position the boot against the toe
piece and slide the heel forward un-
til it contacts the boot. Make sure
the heel piece “clicks” and locks
into position on the track.
Push the boot into the system and
verify the forward pressure.Once
the forward pressure is correct, the
number on the metal band directly
in front of the heel provides a
guide to the quick positioning of
the second heel.
jig aligns with center mark of ski.
When installing a Smartrak plate
make sure the recessed slots at the
front of the interface are positioned
towards the tip of ski
a 1999 to
b Width
the jig and repositioning them to
achieve the desired width. Fig. A
The pads are properly positioned
when they touch the jig shoulder.
• 98-124 mm skis: Thin sides of
the reversible pads are positioned
to the inside of the ski. Fig. Sa
D F
S TEP 2
Smartrak Control, Response, and Install the heel piece by lifting the
Prolink (adjustable toe systems): tab located just in front of the heel
Insert the metal band into the piece and sliding the heel assem-
recessed slots in center of plate. bly onto the Smartrak plate until
Fig. A the boot sole length number on the
metal band corresponds to, or is
Determine the sole length of boot
slightly greater than, the sole length
to being used.
of the boot being used. For exam-
Lift the tab behind the AFD on the ple: a boot sole length of 306mm
toe piece and slide the toe piece would require that you chose a set-
from the rear of track to the front ting on band of 308mm. Make sure
until the boot sole length number the heel piece “clicks” and locks
on the metal band corresponds into position on the track. Fig. F
to, or is slightly greater than, the
Install the break in the normal
sole length of the boot being used.
manner and proceed with binding
For example: a boot sole length
to boot adjustments as described
of 306mm would require that you
on page 14 or page 24.
chose a setting on the band of
308mm. Make sure the toe piece
“clicks” and locks into position on
the track. Fig. D
Proceed with drilling, taping, and Assemble Smartrak binding follow-
gluing as described on page 9. ing instruction as explained above
in Smartrak System Installation.
Wide Ski Brakes
Current Bindings
2007 to
Current
(except LAB & (LAB &
STH)* STH)*
Ski Leasure
(mm)
Performance
Ref. #
(Quadrax)
Ref. #
Freeskiing
Ref. #
• 8 0-106 mm skis: Wide sides of 80 78574801 78574801 78575501
the reversible pads are positioned 85
78145901
to the inside of the ski. Fig. Sb 78574901
90 78575001 78575701
Refer to the Wide Ski Brakes chart
100 78575101 78575801
(right). The proper width fat ski
115 78575201 78575901
brake must be installed for each
130 78830601 78855701
specific system or indemnification
for that system will not apply. *See Spare Parts (page 70) for full details.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
 Binding
Installation > Model-specific Installation (continued)
Lightrak Plate
A S
STEP 2
D F
Mounting and Adjusting
Open and set the blade in straight
position and place it on the plate
with a rotational motion. Fig. A.
Identify the length of the boot sole.
Mount the toe piece:
Identify the letter that corresponds
the sole length and screw the toe
piece (if you are between two let-
ters, choose the higher one).
Steeringplate Interface
Jig Use With Extra Large Boot Soles
Occasionally a boot sole is too
large to fit a jig. In this instance,
the following procedure should
be used to allow correct mount-
ing of the binding:
1. Open the jig to its fully extend-
ed position.
2. Place the boot heel into the jig
against the heel guide.
Competition Bindings > Intended Use
Salomon distributes competition
bindings to racers and coaches.
These bindings are intended to be
used by skiers with special reten-
SPM 11 EN.indb 12
Retail Systems > Installation > 12
Mount the heel piece:
Slide the heel piece on the interface
from the rear using the manual lock
to authorize the gliding. Fig. S.
Mount the brake following the
usual procedure. Fig. D.
Position the boot in the toe and
slide the heel until it touches the
boot.
Compatible with quadrax and Z bind-
ing.
Mounting: according to the boot sole
length selected, tighten the screws
3. Measure the length of the sole
that extends over the toe arrow
(viewed from the underside) of
the jig.
4. Divide this length in half (mea-
surement A).
5. Place the fully extended jig onto
the ski with the boot mid-sole
mark aligned with the mid-sole
mark on the ski.
tion needs. If these bindings are
used by recreational skiers, there
is a far greater risk of injury due to
the use of more powerful springs.
Step in the boot and check forward
pressure, the arrow on the lock
must be within the scribed area.
Fig. F.
Note: the rear number on the blade
is an indication for a quick adjust-
ment of the second ski.
on the toe and heel pieces (4Nm 333-361mm 353-381mm
torque) in the corresponding position Mount the brake following the usual
on interface: procedure.
253-281mm 273-301mm
293-321mm 313-341mm
6. Move the jig forward of the 8. Install the bindings. (Verify that
mid-sole the same distance as screw penetration will not ex-
measurement A and drill the toe ceed hole depth.)
holes.
7. Re-align the jig’s mid-sole mark
to the ski’s mid-sole mark.
Move the jig backwards from
the mid-sole mark the same
distance as measurement A and
drill the heel holes.
Refer to Requested Settings for
instructions for skiers request-
ing settings not recommended by
Salomon.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
 Binding Retail Systems > Installation > 13

Installation > Model-specific Installation (continued)

LAB Binding installation
Installation of the Z14 LAB, 914 LAB, 916 LAB, 920 LAB bindings
WARNING: The 914 LAB, 916 LAB, and 920 LAB are the only bindings that should be installed on the ZZ interface

A S D F

S TEP 2
G H

Assembly
Measure boot sole length in mm and
then break the yellow plastic blade
spacer (Fig. A) at the appropriate
length (the resulting spacer should
include the last tab which matches
the boot length).
Slide the yellow blade spacer onto the
metal blade until it rests against the
black base plate. Make sure the metal
blade is properly seated in spacer.
Insert the end of the blade spacer
into the recessed area on the bottom
of the toe piece base plate. Fig. S
Insert the post of the metal blade ate lifter shim, (yellow = 2 mm,
lock plate between the rear two black = 1 mm). Do not add more
screws of the toe piece. Press than 5 mm of lifters.
firmly into place. Fig. D
Lifter shims are an option on all
LAB models except the Z14 LAB.
If required, attach the appropri-

Mounting
To begin mounting any LAB binding ZZ interface using the screw posi- ward of the end of the stainless
model onto any interface except the tion number code (1 or 2) found in steel heel track. Fig. G
ZZ Speed 2 see the note below then the ZZ Speed 2 Installation Chart. Tighten the heel screws in a criss- ZZ Speed 2 Installation
procede to next step. To mount Fig. F cross pattern. Boot sole Size Screw Position
onto the ZZ Speed 2 interface, length Letter
Tighten the toe screws in a criss- Verify that the height suits FIS (mm) Code 1 2
select a ski with the correct size cross pattern. norm limits (50-55 mm). 265-297 S 265-282 283-297
ZZ interface plate (S, M, or L) for
Verify that the heel track is posi- Install the brake. 298-327 M 298-311 312-327
the boot sole length by referring to
tioned correctly. The end of the 328-343 L (N/A) 328-343
the ZZ Speed 2 Installation Chart.
metal blade should be 3 mm for-
Align the binding assembly on the

Adjustment
Place boot into binding system tion), adjust the forward pressure to
and adjust the toe as usual. align the top of the head screw with Reference
Check the forward pressure: With the back of the heel track. Fig. H Page # Section Name

the boot in the binding (closed posi- 8 Jig Selection & Use
9 Drilling, Tapping & Glue
15 Release Value Selection &
Adjustment
15 Requested Settings

PARTS (see page 70)

Note Reference # Item Name

Installing any LAB binding model onto any interface except the ZZ Speed 2 requires a slightly different approach to assembly 000902 Salomon Adjustment Tool
and mounting. Assembly: the yellow plastic blade spacer has letter codes corresponding to the boot sole length and must be 001023 Adult Binding Paper Jig
broken at the appropriate tab. Make a note of this letter. The rest of the assembly is the same. Mounting begins by aligning the
binding assembly’s center mark (arrow on the yellow blade spacer) to the corresponding letter code on the interface before 001056 Salomon Powder Option
tightening the toe screws and continuing with the rest of the mounting and adjustment as with current models. 887528 Poweraxe Paper Jig

SPM 11 EN.indb 13 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding
Binding-to-Boot Adjustments
Adjusting
Heel Position / Forward Pressure
All forward pressure adjustments should be verified with the boot in the binding.
A S
Adjustment Tab Models.
(All current retail models) Check
that the tip of the boot sole is
flush against the butt plate of
the toe piece (or central roller of
applicable models). The forward
S TEP 3
pressure is correct when the ar-
row on the adjustment tab lines
up within the scribed area at the
end of the heel housing Fig. A or
when the arrow of the rear of the
heel housing lines up within the
Toe Cup Width
G H
Correct
Independent Wing
Adjustment Models.
The adjustment screws for mod-
els with independent wing adjust-
ments are located on each side of
the toe piece. Adjust each wing
snugly against the boot sole so
that the boot is centered over the
ski. Fig. G Do not over tighten
Fig. H as it forces the boot back-
ward, increasing the forward pres-
sure. When properly adjusted, the
Toe Height
K must have a clearance of 0-0.5
SPM 11 EN.indb 14
Retail Systems > Adjustment > 14
scribed area on the adjustment
tab. Fig. S 2009/2010 models
no longer have embossed arrows
on the adjustment tab. The back
edge of the tab should be used
instead. Fig. D If this adjustment
is incorrect, remove the boot from
the binding, lift the adjustment tab
using a Salomon Adjustment Tool
and slide the heel to the desired
position. Fig. F Re-insert the
boot and check the adjustment.
Incorrect
toe contacts the boot sole at three
points: the butt plate and the low
friction inserts in each wing arm.
Simultaneous Wing
Adjustment Models.
(916, S914, S912, S810, S850
Models and their predecessors). The
adjustment screw for models with
simultaneous wing adjustments is
located on the left of the toe piece.
Fig. J By turning this screw, both
toe wings adjust ­
All Salomon retail binding models
mm between the AFD and boot
toe. Fig. K
Automatic Wing
Adjustment Models.
Toe height adjusts automatically
on all current automatic wing
adjustment binding models (Z14
to TZ 5).
D F
Micro Metric Heel Adjustment
for the STH 16 and 12.
With the boot in the binding (closed
position), adjust the forward pres-
sure to align the top of the screw
head with the back of the heel track.
Fig. G
J
simultaneously. Adjust the wings
snugly against the boot sole. Do not
over tighten. The toe cup adjust-
ment is correct when there are three
points of contact: the butt plate
and the low friction inserts on each
wing arm.
Automatic Wing
Adjustment Models.
Spheric Sport and Quadrax model
toe wings adjust automatically. The
C305 adjusts automatically to ac-
Manual Models.
Currently only the 914 bind-
ing model features manual toe
height adjustment. Raise the toe
by turning the adjustment screw,
located on top of the toe piece,
counterclockwise. Pull the boot
back to create a gap between the
boot sole and the binding AFD.
Adjust the toe height to create a
gap of not more than 0.5 mm or
until the boot sole just touches the
G
cept either children’s or adult norm
boots. (The added width of an adult
norm boot sole somewhat limits the
shock absorption capability of the
C305. It is suggested that aggres-
sive junior skiers with an adult norm
boot sole use a model designed ex-
clusively for adult norm boots.)
AFD. You can use a Salomon 0.5
mm toe height adjust­ment card to
gauge this clearance. Do not over
tighten. (Always re-check the
forward pressure adjustment after
making any toe cup adjustments.)
Reference
Page # Section Name
15 Release Value Selection &
Adjustment
33 AFD Replacement
10/14/10 4:28 PM
 Binding Retail Systems > Release value > 15

Release Value Selection & Adjustment

Determining Skier Type
It is the skier’s responsibility to determine Skier
Type. Skier Type is not the same as skier ability
and the two should not be confused. Skier Type
must be indicated on the workshop form or rental
form by the skier. The Skier Classification Chart
is available in small and large poster size versions
from Salomon and should be displayed to assist
customers in classifying themselves.
What type of skier are you?
Determining your SKIER TYPE is
your responsibility! Your skier
type, height, weight, age and ski
boot sole length are used by the
shop to determine the visual indi-
cator settings of your ski bindings.
Be sure to provide accurate infor-
mation, as any error may increase
your risk of injury. Consult these
descriptions to select your clas-
sification:
These descriptions are compatible with ASTM and ISO documents.
TYPE 1 “Cautious skiing at
LOWER visual indicator settings”
• Prefer slow to moderate speeds.
• Prefer gentle to moderate ter-
rain.
• Receive lower than average vi-
sual indicator settings. This may
increase the risk of inadvertent
binding release in order to in-
crease the likelihood of release
in a fall.
• Type 1 settings apply to “entry-
level skiers uncertain of their
classification”.
TYPE 2 “Moderate skiing at
AVERAGE visual indicator set-
tings”
• Prefer a variety of speeds.
• Prefer varied terrain.
• Type 2 skiers are skiers who do
not meet all the descriptions of
Type 1 or Type 3 skier types.
TYPE 3 “Aggressive skiing at
HIGHER visual indicator settings”
• Prefer fast speeds.
• Prefer steep terrain.
• Receive higher than average vi-
sual indicator settings. This may
reduce the likelihood of release
in a fall in order to decrease the
risk of inadvertent binding re-
lease.
If from experience, you have been
dissatisfied with visual indicator
settings resulting from your se-
lected skier type classification, you
may wish to consider: (a) chang-
ing your skier type classification;
(b) selecting different skier type
classifications for toe and heel
components; (c) selecting skier
Types -1 ("for skiers who desire
visual indicator settings lower than
settings for a Type 1 skier") or 3+
("for skiers who desire visual indi-
cator settings higher than settings
for a Type 3 skier").

S TEP 4
Requested Settings
Skiers Requesting Settings Not Recommended by Salomon
Release Agreement
The 2010/2011 Salomon Adjustment Chart is the only release adjustment
chart authorized for use by Salomon dealers during the 2010/2011 sea- I,
son. Salomon recognizes a skier’s right to choose settings outside those hereby acknowledge that I have been advised by the
recommended as per the current Salomon Adjustment Chart (particularly
when the skier’s preferred setting is also within the range of acceptable (rental shop, sales department, etc.) that the setting which I have
settings).
requested for my bindings (Model )
If the skier requests a setting other than the one derived from the current
is not the setting recommended by the manufacturer of the bindings for
Salomon Adjustment Chart, the shop may:
a skier of my height, weight, age and skier type. I understand that as a
• Adjust the system to individual requests IF the technician notes on
condition of obtaining this setting on the bindings at the time of their de-
the workshop or rental form the reason the higher or lower setting
livery, I must agree to forever release the shop, its employees and agents,
was requested. The customer must verify the request for the higher or
the manufacturer, and the distributor from any and all liability for injury
lower settings by signing and dating the form by the noted reason of
or death which results to me or others from the use of these bindings. I
the setting request. (It is suggested that the shop have the skier sign a
acknowledge that there may be increased risk of injury or death to me as
release identical to the Release Agreement printed on this page. The
a result of my own personal preference for binding setting, particularly in
release must then be attached to the completed workshop or rental
view of the inherent and other risks of the sport of skiing. I hereby waive
form.) NOTE: Current Salomon workshop and rental forms include a
all claims arising from the use of the bindings and release from all liabil-
"Requested Settings" option for customer requested settings, which
ity the shop, the distributor and the manufacturer, their agents and em-
eliminates the need for a separate release in such instances.
ployees and I further agree to indemnify them from any and all liability or
• Adjust the system to the setting derived from the Salomon Adjustment
harm or damage of any kind whatsoever which may result from the use of
Chart and instruct the skier on how to change the setting.
these bindings by myself or anyone I allow to use the bindings.
I, the undersigned, have read and understand this liability release agree-
ment, and agree that it is binding upon me, my heirs, guardians, adminis-
trators, assigns, and legal representatives.

Skier Signature
(or, in the case of a minor, that of the skier’s parent or guardian)

Shop Manager’s Signature

SPM 11 EN.indb 15 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding Retail Systems > Release value > 16

Release Value Selection & Adjustment > (continued)

2010/2011 Salomon Adjustment Chart
All current model Salomon Torque Range
bindings use the DIN
(Newton Meters)

adjustment scale. Release

Inspection Range

In-use Range
setting numbers on this 2010/2011 ADJUSTMENT CHART REF.

scale are referred to as Skier Initial Toe/Heel Indicator Twist Forward

by Boot Sole Length (mm) Lean
“visual indicator set- <- >-
Weight Height Skier 231- 251- 271- 291- 311- 331-
tings.” Some older model lb kg ft-in/cm Code* 230 mm 250 mm 270 mm 290 mm 310 mm 330 mm 350 mm 351 mm 5 18
Salomon bindings were 22-
29
10-
13 A 3/
4
3/
4
3/
4 8 29
manufactured prior to the 30- 14- 3/ 3/ 3/
B 1 4 4 4 11 40
establishment of the DIN 38 17

standard scale and use 39-

47
18-
21 C 11/2 11/4 11/4 1 14 52
a different adjustment 48-
56
22-
25 D 2 13/4 11/2 11/2 11/4 17 64
scale. Refer to previous
Shop Practices Manuals to
57-
66
26-
30 E 21/2 21/4 2 13/4 11/2 11/2 20 75
adjust these models. 67-
78
31-
35 F 3 23/4 21/2 21/4 2 13/4 13/4 23 87
The 2010/2011 79-
91
36-
41 G 31/2 3 23/4 21/2 21/4 2 27 102
Adjustment Chart is the
42- <- 4'10"
only release adjustment
92-
107 48 <- 148 cm H 31/2 3 3 23/4 21/2 31 120
chart authorized for 108-
125
49- 4'11"-5'1"
57 149-157 cm I 41/2 4 31/2 31/2 3 37 141
Salomon dealers during
S TEP 4

126- 58- 5'2"-5'5"

J 51/2 5 41/2 4 31/2 3 43 165
the 2010/2011 season. 147 66 158-166 cm

Only those settings 148-

174
67-
78
5'6"-5'10"
167-178 cm K 61/2 6 51/2 5 41/2 4 50 194
recommended by Salomon 175- 79- 5'11"-6'4"
L 71/2 7 61/2 6 51/2 5 58 229
209 94 179-194 cm
should be used when de- >- >- >- 6'5"
termining the appropriate 210 95 >- 195 cm M 81/2 8 7 61/2 6 67 271
adjustment for each skier’s N 10 91/2 81/2 8 71/2 78 320
system. Refer to Skier’s
O 111/2 11 10 91/2 9 91 380
Requesting Settings
Not Recommended by P 12 11 101/2 105 452
Salomon (page 15) for 121 520
skiers requesting other
settings. * Based on "Type 1" Skier 137 588

Determining & Adjusting Visual Indicator Settings

The following procedure is used for
determining visual indicator set-
tings using the 2010/2011 Salomon
Adjustment Chart.
1. Find the Skier’s Code. Locate the
skier’s weight and height in the
first two columns. If the skier’s
weight and height are not in the
same row, select the Skier’s code
that is closest to the top of the
chart.
2. The skier’s code is appropriate for
Type 1 skiers:
• For Type 2 skiers, move down
on the chart one row.
• For Type 3 skiers, move down
on the chart two rows.
• For Type -1 skiers, move up on
the chart one row.
• For Type 3+ skiers, move down
on the chart three rows.
• A skier may select different skier
types for toe and heel piece.
3. For skiers age 9 and younger or
age 50 and older, move up the
chart one row.
• For skiers 29 lbs. and under, no
further correction is appropriate.
• For skiers 38 lbs. and under,
Skier Type -1 is inappropriate.
4. Locate the column that represents
the skier’s boot sole length (in
mm).
5. The box at the intersection of the
skier’s boot sole length column
and the Skier’s Code row shows
the initial visual indicator setting
for the skier. If the intersection
of the row and column falls in a
blank box, move left or right on
the same row to the nearest box
showing a visual indicator setting.
6. Record the visual indicator set-
tings on the Workshop Form.
• If a skier selects different skier
types for toe and heel piece, it
must be recorded on the work-
shop or rental form in the order
toe/heel (T/H), using a (/) to
separate the two types.
Visual Indicator Setting Adjustment
Adjust both toes and heels of the
system to the visual indicator setting
derived from the adjustment chart.
Sometimes a technician may experi-
ence difficulty determining exactly
where the visual indicator should
appear in the binding’s visual indica-
tor window. For example, a setting of
51/2 is not precisely marked on the
binding. The technician should use
those values that are clearly marked
on the binding as reference points
and set the release adjustment as
close as possible to the setting that
is recorded on the Workshop Form.

SPM 11 EN.indb 16 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding Retail Systems > Final Checking > 17

Final Checking & Visual Inspection

While anyone can mount and adjust a Salomon binding, to receive ­indemnification from Salomon a Salomon
Certified Technician must sign or initial the Workshop Form attesting that all systems inspections have been
performed. A Final Check is your quality control measure to verify that all required procedures have been
properly completed.

Visual Inspection of System Components

Common Compatibility Problems

The Boot
• Inconsistencies with ISO and
applicable norms.
• Gross irregularities where the
boot contacts the binding and
the AFD.
• Unacceptable low grade
thermoplastic construction.
• Rubber and/or metal tip
protectors
• Mold flashings.
• Excessive wear.
The Binding Components
• Stripped, loose or
missing screws.
• Condition of the AFD (ripped,
loose, imbedded dirt, boot sole
pattern, tread imprint, etc.).
• Condition of anti-friction inserts
(where applicable).
• Missing or unreadable visual
indicators and missing windows.
• Bent or broken baseplate,
principal axis or housing.
• Debris lodged in the sole.
• Warped or improperly canted
boot sole.
• Cut-outs in the sole that
impede proper brake function.
(If you are uncertain of boot
compatibility, perform the Clean
vs. Lubricated Test. Boots that
fail this test or violate any of the
above points should not be used
with any Salomon binding.)
• Stripped or jammed toe height
and cup adjustment screws.
• Jammed release adjustment
screw.
• Other visible wear.
• Improperly installed leash
or brake.
• Irregular heel track function.
• Bent or broken baseplate, track
or heel.
The Ski
• Mounting screws protruding
through the base.
• Delaminated sidewall. This can
be detected visually or by run-
ning your fingers along the sides
of the ski.
• Binding baseplates not flush with
ski surface.
The Ski Brake
• Improper brake arm length.
• Improper installation.
• Broken entry pedals.
• Bent or broken brake arms.
Visual Inspection of the Complete System
Place the boot in the binding and check the accuracy of:
• Toe height adjustment
(if applicable).
• Toe cup width adjustment
(if applicable).
• Central roller adjustment
(if applicable).
• Delaminated topskin.
• Pre-drilled holes. As a general
rule, bindings should not be
installed on skis that have previ-
ously been drilled for three or
more sets of bindings.
• Strength of ski brake. A brake
must not compress totally when
the ski is set on a flat surface.
• Other visible wear.
• Forward pressure adjustment.
• Visual indicator settings.
• Symmetrical mounting of bind-
ings to ski center line (1 mm).
This should be in the same loca-
tion on both skis.

S TEP 5
Test for Elastic Travel & Return Test for Boot/Binding Compatibility
Check the boot/binding combination to ensure all components are com-
A S patible. Unless a binding is specifically designed for use with both junior
and adult norm boot soles, adult and junior systems cannot be combined,
e.g., junior boots with adult bindings or vice versa. If the system passes
this test, mark “Pass” ( ) on the Workshop Form for “Test of Boot-
Binding Compatibility.”
If you are not sure that the boot complies with standards or if you are not
sure that the system components are compatible, see Troubleshooting.
Lateral
Secure the ski. Hit the forefoot area of the boot with an object that will not
damage the boot, such as a rubber hammer. Fig. A Use sufficient force
to move the boot off-center, but not hard enough to release the system.
The boot should move off-center at least 5 mm and return to center
within 2 mm of its original position.
Vertical
Depress the heel lever while pulling forward on the upper cuff of the boot
until the boot heel lifts at least 5 mm. Fig. S Release both hands simul-
taneously. The boot should return to the ski quickly and smoothly. This
inspection can be performed either manually or by using a mechanical
testing device. If a testing device is used, follow the recommendations of Reference
Page # Section Name
the test device manufacturer for proper procedure.
47 Standard Boot Sole
If the system passes these tests, mark “Pass” ( ) on the Workshop Dimensions
Form for “Test for Elastic Travel & Return”. If the system fails, see 19 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting. 21 Salomon Workshop Form

SPM 11 EN.indb 17 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding Retail Systems > Testing > 18

Mechanical Inspection
It is a requirement* for Salomon indemnification that all ski/binding/boot systems be verified using a force
or torque measuring device.**
A previously damaged binding component or boot may break during the added stress of mechanical testing.
Consumers should be advised of this possibility prior to any mechanical testing of their equipment.

Twist Test & Forward Lean Tests > Release Value Within Specified Range

Twist Test (Toe)

Examples of Middle Sample Systems Inspection Ranges
A Quantitative Values Based on Skier Code "L"

3 Maximum Middle x 43
Release Quantitative Value

INSPECTION RANGE
Values (Test Result) 50

IN-USE RANGE
45, 40, 50 45 REF 58
60, 50, 50 50
30, 40, 45 40 67
55, 65, 60 60 x 78

Exercise the toe by releas­ing it once
in each direction. Measure and
record the test result for both clock-
wise and counterclockwise direc-
tions Fig. A with a force or torque-
measuring device. The test result is
the middle quantitative value of three
measured release values. If the first
two measured values are the same,
there is no need to take a third mea-
surement. See Examples of Middle
Quantitative Values (above)
The toe passes this inspection if
the test results in both directions
fall within the “Inspection Range”
as determined from the Salomon inspection range, you may have an
Adjustment Chart. See Sample installation error or an incompatible
Systems Inspection Ranges boot. This is known as asymmetric
(above). release. Troubleshoot the system and
If your test results for clock­wise and re-test after the problem has been
counterclockwise release appear corrected.
to be at opposite extremes of the

Forward Lean Test (Heel)

Exercise the heel by releasing it within the appropriate inspec-
S once. Measure and record the tion range, mark “Pass” ( ) on
test result using a force or torque the Workshop Form for “Release
measuring device. Fig. S The Value Within Specified Range.”
test result should be within the
“Inspection Range.” If both twist
and forward lean results fall
S TEP 6

Reference
Page # Section Name

Results Not Within the Specified Range
If the Twist Test or Forward
Lean Test results are not within
the “Inspection Range” but are
within the greater “In-Use Range,”
the visual indicator of the com-
ponent affecting the test result
should be readjusted to bring the
test result within the “Inspection
Range.” If the test result is out-
side the “In-Use Range,” refer to
Troubleshooting. It is not neces-
sary to record any of the test re-
sults on the Workshop Form. It is
only necessary to record whether
the system passed or failed each
inspection and the final visual
indicator settings. Any system
component that repeatedly fails
any inspection should not remain
in use. When the technician is sat-
isfied that all required procedures
have been completed according
16 2010/2011 Salomon
Adjustment Chart
19 Troubleshooting
21 Salomon Workshop Form
NOTE
to Salomon’s recommendations in *U.S. Dealers only; recommended
this manual, he or she must sign for Canadian Dealers.
the Workshop Form. (The signing **For Salomon indemnification to
technician must be currently certi- apply, the shop must follow the
test device
fied by Salomon.) manufacturer’s requirements for:
• Proper use.
• Valid calibration.
• Calibration check at recommend-
ed intervals.
• Consistent results between tech-
nicians operating this device.

SPM 11 EN.indb 18 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding
Mechanical Inspection > Troubleshooting
Boot/Binding systems wear with time. This is expected. Normal wear and/or fatigue of a system can be
expected. If a system inspection indicates a system is not functioning as intended, the cause of the problem
must be identified and corrective action should be taken.
Troubleshooting
The first step is to re-examine each
component of the ski/binding/boot
system individually. If a problem
is found, e.g., stripped toe height
screw, out-of-standard boot sole,
improperly mounted binding, miss-
ing AFD, etc., proper Binding-to-
Boot Adjustments cannot be made.
No further work can be performed
on the system. Mark “Fail” ( )
on this section of the Workshop
Form.*
On used bindings, inspect all boot
to binding points of contact for ex-
cessive wear.
If the system failed the Test for
Elastic Travel & Return, check
that all boot/binding interfaces are
clean, smooth and clear of debris.
If the boot is dirty, clean it with a
solution of mild dish washing soap
and water. If the binding is dirty,
clean it according to the proce-
dures described in Maintenance
and Repair. Check that the boot
enters the binding correctly. Make
* The customer should be informed of, and authorize, action needed to correct the problem. Please refer to
the Technical Reference section for warranty information on binding components covered under warranty.
Compatibility Tables: Clean vs. Lubricated Tests
Twist Test
100
90
80
70
Fail
60
50
Lubricated Test
40
30
20
Twist (Nm)
10
0 0
0 10 20 30
Twist (Nm)
Clean Test
SPM 11 EN.indb 19
Retail Systems > Testing > 19
sure the boot is properly positioned
in the toe and heel cups. Check
the visual indicator settings. They
should not exceed the minimum or
maximum setting and should be set
appropriately for the skier. Re-test
the system for Elastic Travel &
Return. If the system fails this test,
mark "Fail" ( ) on this section of
the Workshop Form.*
If the system failed the Test For
Boot/Binding Compatibility, mark
"Fail" ( ) on this section of the
Workshop Form.* If you are not
sure that the boot complies with
the mandatory standards, or if you
are not sure that the boot/binding
system components are compat-
ible, do a Clean vs. Lubricated
Test. To perform a Clean vs.
Lubricated Test, all adjustments
to the system, e.g., visual indicator
settings, forward pressure adjust-
ments, etc., must be the same as
when the system was previously
tested. Lubricate the boot with a
Pass
Lubricated Test
Fail
40 50 60 70 80 90 100
mild dish washing soap wherever outside the “In-Use Range,” mark
it contacts the binding and wipe off “Fail” ( ) on this section of the
any excess lubricant. Perform the Workshop Form.*
Twist Test and Forward Lean Test If the customer refuses to have
as done previously and record your work done that is necessary to
results. Next, compare the results bring the system within standards,
of the lubricated test with those of or requests work that violates the
the previously performed non-lu- recommendations of this manual,
bricated clean test. Plot the results the ­technician should check the box
on the Compatibility Tables. If the next to the statement ­indicating
results don’t fall within the shaded out-of-standard components on
“Pass” window on the table, the the Workshop Form. A note should
BOOT is incompatible with the be made in the Comment section
binding and should not be used. of the form describing the problem
Mark “Fail” ( ) on the Workshop and the skier should be warned
Form.* that continued use of the system
If no problems have been found is inadvisable. The shop will not be
with the system and the Release indemnified for work done on that
Value Within Specified Range can- system.
not be obtained, further tests must
be undertaken. First, switch testers
Reference
to check operator accuracy. Next, Page # Section Name
check the accuracy of the testing 17 Test For Elastic Travel
device per the device manufac- and Return
turer’s recommendations. Re-test 17 Test For Boot/Binding
the system. If the system releases Compatibility
21 Salomon Workshop Form
85 Salomon Retail Binding
Limited Warranty
Forward Lean Test
400 S TEP 6
360
320
280
Fail
240
Pass
200
160
Forward Lean (Nm)
120
80
Fail
40
0 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 360 400
Forward Lean (Nm)
Clean Test
10/14/10 4:28 PM
 Binding
Skier Instruction, Warning & Record Keeping
Skier Instruction & Warning
When the Certified Technician signs
or initials the Workshop Form, the
technician attests that all proce-
dures have been completed. It is
not necessary for the technician to
personally provide the skier with in-
structions as long as the shop does.
To help reduce your shop’s liability
risk and to receive indemnification
from Salomon, take the following
steps whenever a skier picks up
their equipment. (If the individual
picking up the equipment is not the
intended user, treat that individual as
though they were the intended user.
In the case of minor skiers, follow
these steps in the presence of both
the minor skier and a parent or legal
guardian.)
Explanation of Entry/Exit/Re-entry
The proper use of the system (entry,
exit and re-entry) must be explained
using the skier’s own system as an
example.
Explanation of Parts and
Release Adjustments
Show the skier where the visual
indicator adjustment caps/screws
are located. Point out the binding-
to-boot adjustments. Indicate where
the visual indicator settings are
Retail Record Keeping
A Salomon authorized shop is
required to keep accurate records
of work performed. Aside from the
legal reasons, accurate records pro-
vide a permanent history of the cus-
tomers you have serviced over the
years. Workshop records must be
kept for five years or for the statute
of limitations of the state or prov-
ince, whichever period is longer.
The following is a list of informa-
tion* that must be recorded every
time a Salomon binding is mounted
and/or adjusted. It is not necessary
to use a Salomon Workshop Form,
but any form that the shop uses
S TEP 7
should include all the information
listed below.*
1. *Date of transaction.
2. *Name and address of the skier.
3. *Skier’s height, weight, age and
skier type.
4. *Skis (brand, model and serial
number).
5. *Boot (brand, model and sole
length).
6. *Binding (brand and model).
SPM 11 EN.indb 20
Retail Systems > Record Keeping > 20
recorded on the Workshop Form and
have the customer verify that the
settings recorded on the form agree
with the settings appearing in the
visual indicator window of the bind-
ing. (It is not necessary to explain
how these numbers are derived.)
Although skiers may work on their
own system, suggest that if a prob-
lem develops, the system should
be taken to a Salomon Authorized
Binding Dealer.
Receipt of In-Box Instructions
When a skier purchases a new
binding, it is required that they also
receive the in-box pamphlet included
in each binding box. The pamphlet
should be reviewed with the skier so
that it is fully understood.
Skier Signature on the
Workshop Form
The skier must read and under-
stand the conditions specified in the
Liability Release Agreement. Point
out that the skier is signing a release
of liability and that included in the
release is a specific warning that
the binding will not release under
all circumstances nor is it possible
to predict every situation in which it
7. *Skier’s Code.
8. *System inspection results
("Pass" or "Fail" for all functional
tests must be indicated).
9. *Visual indicator settings.
10. *Salomon Certified Technician’s
initials or signature attesting
that all functional tests and
instructional procedures have
been completed.
11. *Liability Release Agreement
which is either the same as/
or substantial equivalent of the
Salomon form.
12. *Skier signature (or that of the
skier’s agent or, in the case of a
minor, that of the skier’s parent
or guardian) attesting that the
skier:
a. Has been instructed in the
proper use of the equipment.
b. Has received the in-box pam-
phlet (new bindings only).
c. Has verified that the visual
indicator settings correspond
to the recorded visual indica-
tor settings.
will release, and it is, therefore, no
guarantee of the skier’s safety.
The Skier must then sign the
Workshop Form, indicating the
skier:
• Has been instructed in the proper
use of the equipment.
• Has received the in-box pamphlet
(new bindings only).
• Has verified that the visual indicator
settings correspond to the record-
ed settings on the Workshop Form.
• Has read and understands the spe-
cific information on the Workshop
Form that releases the shop, manu-
facturer and distributor from liabil-
ity.
• Understands that skiing involves
inherent risks and that injuries are
a common and ordinary occurrence
of the sport.
• Understands that included in the
Liability Release Agreement is the
specific warning that the binding
will not release at all times or under
all circumstances where release
may prevent injury or death, nor is
it possible to predict every situa-
tion in which it will release, and it
is, therefore, no guarantee of their
safety.
d. Has read and understands the
Liability Release Agreement
on the Workshop Form.
e. Understands that there are
inherent and other risks in
the sport of snow skiing and
agrees to assume those risks.
f. Understands that included
in the Liability Release
Agreement is the specific
warning that the binding will
not release under all circum-
stances where release may
prevent injury or death, nor
is it possible to predict every
situation in which it will re-
lease, and it is, therefore, no
guarantee of their safety.
g. Understands that bindings
should be maintained as per
suggestions in Maintenance
Guidelines.
13. Notes on the boot sole’s ma-
terial, shape and/or condition
should be made when neces-
sary.
• Understands that the bindings
should be maintained as per
suggestions in Maintenance
Guidelines prior to the beginning
of each season and every 30 skier
days per year.
The person who signs the Workshop
Form should be the intended user of
the equipment. In the case of a mi-
nor skier, the signature on the form
must be that of the skier’s parent
or legal guardian. If someone other
than the skier or the skier’s parent
or guardian picks up the equipment,
this person should be treated as
though he or she were the skier and,
therefore, must sign the Workshop
Form. A note must be placed on the
Workshop Form that the “agent”
must transmit the information to the
intended user. If a skier refuses to
sign the Workshop Form, Salomon
will not provide indemnification and
the shop should consider refusing to
provide service to the skier.
Receipt of Workshop Form
The skier must be given a copy of
the Workshop Form that includes a
signed copy of the Liability Release
Agreement.
14. If the visual indicator settings
vary from the recommended
setting, note the reason for this.
Attach a signed release to the
Workshop Form. NOTE: Current
Salomon workshop and rental
forms include a "Requested
Settings" option for customer
requested settings, which elimi-
nates the need for a separate
release in such instances.
15. Refusal to serve statement. This
statement should be written so
as to absolve the ski shop from
any liability when the customer
refuses to have work performed
as per guidelines of Salomon
and the shop
Note
* Without this information, indemni-
fication will not apply.
Reference
Page # Section Name
21 Salomon Workshop Form
21 Liability Release
Agreement
32 Maintenance Guidelines
10/14/10 4:28 PM
 Binding Retail Systems > Record Keeping > 21
8410009333 ©2005, Moore Wallace All rights reserved. - 0207

Skier Instruction, Warning & Record Keeping

(Shaded areas for shop use only)

Salomon Workshop Form*

Taken Date
By: Due: Date:
Last

Name:
First M.I.
LIABILITY RELEASE AGREEMENT
I understand that the binding system cannot guarantee the user’s
Street safety. In downhill skiing, and skiboarding with skiboards equipped
with release bindings, this binding system will not release at all
City times or under all circumstances where release may prevent injury
State Zip or death, nor is it possible to predict every situation in which it
will release. In snowboarding, cross-country skiing, skiboarding
Phone # with skiboards equipped with non-release bindings, snowshoeing
Your and other sports utilizing equipment with non-release bindings, the
Your Weight lbs. Height ft. in. Age binding system will not ordinarily release during use; these bindings
Downhill Skiing Snowboard are not designed to release as a result of forces generated during
ordinary operation.
Indicate Skier Type: Stance:
Regular Goofy I understand that the sports of skiing, snowboarding, skiboarding,
snowshoeing and other sports (collectively "RECREATIONAL SNOW
L ° R ° SPORTS") involve inherent and other risks of INJURY and DEATH.
Acknowledgement of Personal Information, I voluntarily agree to expressly assume all risks of injury or death
Equipment Instructions & Liability Release that may result from these RECREATIONAL SNOW SPORTS, or
Agreement which relate in any way to the use of this equipment.
I have accurately represented the above listed information and it is
true and correct. I will not use any of my equipment until I have I understand that a helmet designed for RECREATIONAL SNOW
received instruction on its use and I fully understand its use and SPORTS use will help reduce the risk of some types of injuries to
function [including receipt of accompanying manufacturer’s the user at slower speeds. I recognize that serious injury or death
can result from both low and high energy impacts, even when a
instruction pamphlet[s] for new equipment]. I agree to verify that the helmet is worn.
visual indicator settings to be recorded on this form for downhill ski
equipment, and skiboards equipped with release bindings, agree with I AGREE TO RELEASE AND HOLD HARMLESS the facility servicing
the number appearing in the visual indicator windows of the this equipment, its employees, owners, affiliates, agents, officers,
equipment to be listed on this form. I agree to read and execute the directors, and the equipment manufacturers and distributors and
LIABILITY RELEASE AGREEMENT on the back of this form. their successors in interest (collectively "PROVIDERS"), from all
Equipment User’s liability for injury, death, property loss and damage which results
Signature: from the equipment user’s participation in the RECREATIONAL
Parent/Guardian Signature SNOW SPORTS for which the equipment is provided, or which is
(if not adult user): related in any way to the use of this equipment, including all
.
liability which results from the NEGLIGENCE of PROVIDERS, or
SKIS/SNOWBOARD/SKIBOARD Model $
any other person or cause.
Serial No:
BOOTS I further agree to defend and indemnify PROVIDERS for any loss
Model: Sole Length (cm): or damage, including any that results from claims or lawsuits for
BINDINGS personal injury, death, and property loss and damage related in
Brand: Model: any way to the use of this equipment.
POLES
Brand: Length: This agreement is governed by the applicable law of this state or
Other: province. If any provision of this agreement is determined to be
EQUIPMENT TOTAL $ . unenforceable, all other provisions shall be given full force and
Work Requested effect.

I, THE UNDERSIGNED, HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS

LIABILITY RELEASE AGREEMENT.

FWD PRESSURE Equipment

DIN SETTING Labor User’s Signature:
TOE HEIGHT Sub-Total
SCREW TENSION
Tax Date:
WAXED / EDGED
TOTAL $ .
TECH INITIAL: Parent/Guardian/Agent: I verify that I am the parent, guardian or
RELEASE BINDING SYSTEM INSPECTION Skier’s Code agent of the equipment user; I have the authority to enter into this
PASS FAIL N/A agreement on behalf of the equipment user; and I agree to be
Binding-to-Boot Adjustment ( ) ( ) ( ) bound by the terms and conditions of this agreement.
Test for Elastic Travel & Return ( ) ( ) ( )
S TEP 7

Test of Boot-Binding Compatibility ( ) ( ) ( )

Release Value Within Specified Range ( ) ( ) ( )
Parent/Guardian/
Due to system components that are out of standard or otherwise unsuitable, Agent’s Signature:
the work cannot be performed. (See COMMENTS below)
Visual Indicator Settings Requested Settings Date:
L Toe R Toe L Toe R Toe
L Heel R Heel L Heel R Heel
Comments: Note
*U.S. form shown. PARTS (see page 70)
Technician’s Signature: Reference # Item Name

Reference B1WSFM (U.S. only)

Page # Section Name Workshop Form
Name 20 Skier Instruction & B10008 (Can. Bilingual)
Warning Workshop Form

Name

Name

SPM 11 EN.indb 21 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding 22

Rental &
DEMO Binding
Systems
Proper procedures for a Salomon Certified

Photo: Dan Carr. Skier: Sammy Carlson.

Technician to follow while mounting and
adjusting Salomon Rental
and Demo bindings.

Preparation
For general Preparation Instructions, please refer to page 7.
All rental skis must have an Identification Number and a method to record maintenance and testing informa-
tion (e.g., Salomon sample Ski/Binding Maintenance Record and Boot Maintenance Record).
S TEP 1

Boot-to-Binding Compatibility
Bindings are designed to be used with specific norm boot soles, i.e., ju- an adult binding. The C305 and S305 are designed for use with junior
nior norm boot soles with junior bindings and adult norm boot soles with norm boot soles and smaller adult norm boot soles.
adult bindings. Under no circumstances should a junior boot be used with

Jig Selection
Two jigs are needed to mount
current model Salomon rental
bindings. The jigs can be used for
customer service representative
for additional jigs to mount older Rental Jig Selection Chart
Jig Ref. #
models of Salomon rental bind- Synchro
80 - 123 mm

both Synchro and non Synchro ings. Boot Sole Pre-Sets

56 - 99 mm

Wide skis
Ski width

Systems. Please refer to the Models Din Scale Range Required

See Jig Selection & Use on (mm) (Toe height
Rental Jig Selection Chart (right) page 8 for more information. & Toe wings)
for the reference numbers.
Z12 SC 4 to 12 260 - 382 •
See page 24 for Synchro pre-
710 SC 3 to 10 260 - 382
set requirements. Contact your
609 SC 2.5 to 9 260 - 382
609 SR 2.5 to 9 230 - 308
608 SC 2 to 7.5 260 - 382
Jig Ref. # 001003

Jig Ref. # 001040

711 SC 3.5 to 11 260 - 382

L 8 SC 2.5 to 8 260 - 382
Reference
Page # Section Name
L 7 SC 2 to 7.5 260 - 382
7 Boot-to-Binding 607 SR 2 to 7 230 - 308
PARTS (see page 70) Compatibility L 7 SR 2 to 7.5 230 - 308
Reference # Item Name
8 Jig Selection & Use 305 SC 0.75 to 4.5 216 - 304
001156 Adult Retail Jig 9 Drilling, Tapping & Glue 305 SR 0.75 to 4.5 190 - 246
001003 Rental Jig 25 Rental Visual & TZ 5 SR 0.5 to 4.5 190 - 246
001040 Rental Jig Wide Skis Mechanical Inspections TZ 5 SC 0.5 to 4.5 216 - 304
78313301 Extralight Jig 28 Maintenance Records TZ 5 Juniortrak 0.5 to 4.5 24729001 200 - 308

SPM 11 EN.indb 22 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding Rental & Demo > Preparation 23

Installation
There are two basic types of Legend
Synchro System bindings: SC and
SR. While both have a moveable
heel piece, only the SC (Synchro
Center) models have a moveable
toe, allowing both the toe and heel
piece to be adjusted to “center”
the boot. S912 Light
To set up the Synchro Systems,
you will need: Salomon rental bind-
ings with Synchro Heel Guides and

S TEP 2
the parts listed below

C608 SR

PARTS (see page 70)

Reference # Item Name
001156 Adult Retail Jig Heel Track Visual Indicator Adjustment Toe Cup Adjustment Brake Arm
001003 Rental Jig Adjustment Heel Lever Range Toe Height Screw Heel Housing
Loop Indicators Adjustment Toe Length
001191 Wide Sizes Rental Sticker Heel Cup Baseplate
001189 Salomon Boot Sole Adjustment Spheric Pedal/ Screw Adjustment
Brake Pedal AFD Screw Lubrication
Measuring Device Screw Visual Indicator Point*
000902 Rental Adjustment Tool * Use Salomon grease (Ref. #000905) on track.

Salomon Synchro System

A S Color-coded adjustment range indicators
2004/2005 and later Synchro Center Systems use color-coded adjustment
range indicators.
Simply read the boot sole length in mm’s (stamped on the side of the boot
sole) and move the toe to the corresponding mm length range position
Fig. G. Each range is individually color coded.

D F
Then move the heel to the correct color coded mm length mark shown on the
heel track cover Fig. H.
Color coding makes it easier to read. For example: when the toe is positioned
in the yellow (296 – 307 mm) range, look for the matching yellow rectangles
(296 mm, 304 mm, 307 mm) on the heel track cover.

SR Models (non-moveable toe) are
mounted using the Retail procedures.
Non-Synchro System Follow Synchro
System procedures, omitting mea-
surement of boots and affixing
Synchro Stickers.
SC Models (moveable toe) are
mounted using the procedures de-
scribed below.
First, set the jig to the proper posi-
tion. It is imperative that the jig be
set correctly and all bindings be
mounted at the correct position. For
consistent mounting, drill the jig and
pin it in the correct position.
 ext, place the jig properly on the
N
G H
ski, drill the ski and remove any
shavings. Place a drop of glue onto
the drilled holes. On SC (move­able
toe) model bindings, mount the toe
plate securely with the four screws
provided Fig. A. Move the adjust- 300 to 303 mm Heel piece position for a boot
Lines on the sole length of 302 mm
ment lever on the front of the toe to
heel track (white triangle on the heel housing)
the left and con­tinue to slide the toe
onto the plate Fig. S.
Slide the central plate onto the toe
piece, Fig. D then position the heel
over the central plate and holes,
Fig. F and tighten using a criss-
cross pattern.
Toe piece position for a boot
sole length of 302 mm

SPM 11 EN.indb 23 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding
Binding-to-Boot AdJustments
Adjusting
Toe Position
A S850 and other non-current SC
Synchro Center Models. Move
the button on the front of the toe
to the left, and slide the toe to the
Synchro position indicated. Ensure
Heel Position / Forward Pressure
S TEP 3
S D
Finger Adjustment Models.
Lift the adjustment loop at the
back of the heel and slide the
heel forward to the Synchro posi-
tion indicated or until the binding
heel cup contacts the boot heel.
Fig. S Release the loop, push the
Junior TZ 5 SC Installation
A S
G H
The TZ 5 SC comes with an interface
plate which must first be installed
on the ski before sliding the toe and
heel pieces onto its tracks. Mounting
the TZ 5 SC interface plate requires
a new jig (ref. #24729001) though
the procedure should otherwise be
familiar.
SPM 11 EN.indb 24
Rental & Demo > Installation > 24
the toe locks firmly in place. For
models, push the toe back, de-
press the button on the left side
of the toe, and slide the toe into
position. Fig. A The toe locks into
place automatically. The adjust­
ment is correct when the mid-sole
mark on the ski is aligned with the
mid-sole mark on the boot.
boot down and check the forward
pressure indicator. The silver tab
should be visible in the housing
window. Fig. D (It is not neces-
sary to put the boot in the binding
for Synchro applications.)
Center the jig on the ski and drill
as usual (refer to Jig Use as well as
Drilling Tapping & Glue on pages
8 and 9).
Mount the TZ 5 SC interface on the
ski using the screws provided.
Check the manual lock of the toe
piece is totally opened (Fig. A)
Toe Height
Automatic Models.
Sport/Quadrax toes have automatic
toe height a­ djustment.
Micrometric Models.
Raise the toe by turning the ad-
justment screw, located on top of
the toe piece counterclockwise.
Pull the boot back and continue to
Toe Cup Width
Automatic Wing Adjustment
Models. Same as retail counter-
parts (see page 14).
Independent Wing Adjustment
Models. Same as retail counter-
parts (see page 14) or preset for
Synchro systems using a preset
toe width.*
Reference
Page # Section Name
15 Release Value Selection &
Adjustment
25 Pre-Season Inspections
D F
and remove the brake lock from
the brake.
Slide the toe piece onto the front
of the interface until it corresponds
with or is just above your boot sole
length (Fig. S). Make sure the toe
unit clicks into place.
Close the manual lock (Fig. D).
turn the adjustment screw coun-
terclockwise until you see light
between the boot sole and the
binding AFD. Turn the screw clock-
wise until the gap is no more than
0.5 mm or preset for Synchro sys-
tems using a preset toe height.*
Simultaneous Wing Adjustment
Models. Same as retail counter-
parts (see page 14) or preset for
Synchro systems using a preset
toe width.*
Note
* Synchro Presets.
Micrometric toe heights, inde-
pendent and simultaneous wing
adjustments can be preset using
a Standard Norm Boot Sole (page
47) for Synchro applications. A
dab of silicone caulk can then be
put into the slot of the adjustment
screws to prevent tampering.
Slide the heel piece onto the back of
the heel track while holding up the
manual lock (Fig. F) until it cor-
responds with or is just above your
boot sole length (Fig. G). Make
sure the heel unit clicks into place.
Caution: check again that the man-
ual lock of the toe piece is closed
(Fig. H).
10/14/10 4:28 PM
 Binding Rental & Demo > Adjustments > 25

Release Value Selection & Adjustment

2010/2011 Salomon Adjustment Chart
All current Salomon rental bindings must be adjusted according to the 2010/2011 Salomon Adjustment Chart. This is the only
release adjustment chart authorized for Salomon bindings during the 2010/2011 season. For a detailed description of the charts
and procedures recommended by Salomon, please refer to pages 15 & 16 of this Manual.

Rental Visual & Mechanical Inspection

The mechanical inspections discussed in this section are required of U.S. dealers and are strongly recommended for Canadian dealers, both
in the interest of consumer protection and as a sound risk-management strategy. Maintenance records must be kept for all bindings and
boots in inventory for both pre-season and in-season inspections. Only Pass/Fail results should be recorded. If bindings are switched from
one pair of skis to another, this should be noted on the records. To receive indemnification from Salomon, maintenance records must be kept
on file for five years or the statute of limitations in your state or province, whichever is longer.

Rental Inspection Summary

Since it is impractical to perform a developed to verify release indi- procedures by the rental shop equivalent to that provided retail
full inspection each time a system cator accuracy, confirm correct staff. Fully implemented, the pro- shop customers under current ISO
is rented, a routine of preseason equipment function, and assure cedures that follow provide rental [and ASTM] standards.
and inseason inspections has been proper assembly and adjustment shop customers a standard of care

Pre-Season Inspection
Preseason inspections are per-
formed on components of the
release system: bindings and boots.
All rental bindings, new and used,
are visually inspected, and then
tested using specially selected
dure to identify and correct the de-
viation or malfunction. If this proce-
dure does not correct the problem,
the binding is removed from inven-
tory. All rental boots, new and used,
are visually inspected for damage,
at contact points with the binding.
In addition, one boot per “cell” is
tested for boots that are new to the
rental inventory. A cell is all boots
of the same make, model, age, and
shell size. A random selection of
S TEP 4
are performed with a test device and
a pair of specially selected reference
bindings. If a boot fails, all boots
from that cell are then tested. Boots
that fail and cannot be repaired are
removed from inventory.

S TEP 5
Reference Boots. Bindings that fail wear, contamination, broken or 5% of all boots, previously accepted
go through a troubleshooting proce- missing parts, or inferior materials into inventory, is also tested. Tests

Inseason Inspection
Inseason inspections are performed
on complete rental systems to ensure
that the equipment is adjusted appro-
priately and continues to function cor-
rectly. Typically 5% of the rental inven-
tory is tested during each two weeks
sampling period. The random sample
is equally divided between equipment
that is available for rental and equip-
ment that has just been rented. The
equipment in the “as rented” category
is from real skiers in the condition in
which it is either dispatched or re-
turned, while the “available for rental”
equipment may be set up for fictitious
skiers. Only single skis, not pairs, are
tested, and testing at the toe is only the problem is found and corrected.
required in one direction. A count is Then, as inspection results improve,
S TEP 6
maintained of test results that exceed the frequency of sampling and inspec-
allowable limits. The magnitude and tion is relaxed.
frequency of these deviations deter-
mines the frequency of future inspec-
tions. Shops that fail an inspection
must sample daily until the source of

Important Terms
Correction Factor: The value that
must be added or subtracted from the
initial visual indicator setting to bring
the test result within the Inspection
Tolerance (or Inspection Range).
Directions of Release: Unless
otherwise specified (see Inseason
Inspection), the directions of release
to be tested are forward lean and
clockwise and counter clockwise
in twist.
Test Device: A device that meets ISO
standard 11110 [or ASTM standard
F1061] and has been checked and
maintained in the manner specified by
the device manufacturer.
Test Result or Release Torque: The
middle quantitative value of three
tests made in the same direction.

SPM 11 EN.indb 25 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding
Rental Visual & Mechanical Inspection > (continued)
Inspection Procedures
Preseason Inspection
Reference Boot Selection
The Reference Boot is a boot of a
designated sole length that is oth-
erwise typical of the boot inventory.
Use the procedure below if the boot
inventory includes several models
and a representative boot cannot be
easily identified.
1. Select five single boots with sole
lengths as specified in Table A
for the binding type to be tested:
adult, junior, or child.
2. Clean all five boots with a mild
detergent and water.
3. Adjust a rental binding to the re-
lease indicator setting specified
in Table A for the binding type.
4. Fit the binding to the boots and
determine the Release Torque
in all three directions of release
(forward lean and both direc-
tions in twist).
5. Average the Release Torque for
CW and CCW twist release.
6. Reject and replace any boot with
a CW to CCW difference of more
than 6 Nm for adult boots or
4 Nm when testing child boot
types.
7. Rank the five twist results and
select as the Reference Boot for
STEP 5
twist, the middle boot.
8. Rank the five forward lean re-
sults and select as the Reference
Boot for forward lean, the middle
boot.
Preseason Binding Inspection
The procedure that follows is an
integral part of preseason main-
S TEP 6
tenance. It is also a good way to de-
termine if maintenance is adequate
and which units have outlived their
usefulness and must be removed
from inventory.
1. Clean areas of the bindings that
contact the boot and perform
all preseason binding mainte-
nance.
Reference
Page # Section Name
17 Final Checking
17 Test for Elastic Travel &
Return
18 Release Value Within
Specified Range
19 Troubleshooting
47 Standard Boot Sole
Dimensions
SPM 11 EN.indb 26
Rental & Demo > Inspection > 26
2. Visually or manually check:
• AFD condition.
• Brakes function.
• Release indicator readability
and travel.
• Screw tightness.
• [other product specific in-
spections if required]
3. Fit each binding to the
Reference Boot and adjust the
release indicators to the value
in Table A.
4. Check that the heel track and
toe track code (if any) agree
with the sole length code (if
any) of the Reference Boot.
5. With the Reference Boot in the
binding, verify elastic travel of
the toe piece by striking the
boot toe with a mallet or dead
hammer and checking that
the toe piece returns the boot
quickly and completely to cen-
ter.
6. Verify elastic travel of the heel
piece by lifting the boot while
depressing the heel piece cock-
ing lever and checking that
the heel piece returns the boot
quickly and completely to the
latched position. [other product
specific procedures if required]
7. Manually release the binding 3
times in each direction.
8. Lubricate all boot/binding inter-
faces with a mild liquid deter-
gent and water solution.
9. With the Ski Binding Test
Device determine the Release
Torque for each direction of
release (forward lean and both
directions in twist).
10. Record “PASS” in the bind-
ing’s maintenance record if
Test Results are within the
Inspection Ranges provided in
Table A.
Table A : Preseason Binding Inspection*
Sole Release
Skier Binding
Length Indicator
Code Type
(mm) Setting
Twist Forward Lean Twist Forward Lean
F Children 270 2.5
J Junior 306 4.5
L Adult 327 6.0
* This is an example only. Check the manufacturer’s tech manual before proceeding
11. Set the ski aside if the Test
Result in any directions of re-
lease is outside the Inspection
Range in Table A.
12. Follow Troubleshooting
Procedure from the binding
manufacturer’s tech manual for
units that have been set aside
and retest if changes in the
unit’s condition or adjustment
are made.
13. Record “FAIL” in the binding’s
maintenance record if, after
troubleshooting, test results in
any direction of release are out-
side the In-Use Range. Replace
the “failed” unit and retest be-
fore returning the ski to service.
14. If after troubleshooting,
Test Results are outside the
Inspection Range but within
the In-Use Range, apply a
Correction Factor to the unit
and note the Correction Factor
for that unit in the binding’s
maintenance record.
15. If many bindings fail, check the
test device and re-inspect the
Reference Boot. If necessary,
select another boot and retest
the bindings.
Preseason Boot Preparation
The procedure that follows is an
integral part of preseason main-
tenance.
1. Clean all boots with [a mild
detergent and water], and repair
or replace damaged or missing
parts.
2. Visually check:
• Conformance with ISO and
other applicable standards. If
the boot contacts the binding,
brake, or AFD in areas other
than the designated contact
points, it may be incompat-
ible with the binding. [product
specific figure or description]
Reference Torque Inspection Range
(Nm) (Nm)
23 87 20-27 75-102
43 141 37-50 141-194
58 229 50-67 194-271
• Boot material. If the sole
at the contact points with
the binding or AFD can be
scratched with a finger nail,
the boot may be of inferior
quality and incompatible with
the binding.
• Boot sole condition. If the
boot sole is damaged, worn,
or contaminated at contact
points with the binding or AFD
in a manner which can not be
corrected, the boot may be
incompatible with the binding.
• Brake compatibility with sole.
• Rubber and/or metal sole
protectors. If such materials
contact the binding or AFD
the boot may be incompatible
with the binding.
• Mold flashings. Flashing
which can be seen or felt at
contact points with the bind-
ing, brake, or AFD must be
carefully removed.
3. Remove from inventory all
boots that have failed the visual
check.
Preseason Boot Sampling
Although sampling eliminates the
need to test every boot before the
season starts, the sample cho-
sen must be representative of the
inventory.
1. For boots that are new to inven-
tory or have never been in-
spected, take a single boot from
each cell (a cell is all boots of
the same make, model, year,
and shell size).
2. For used boots, take a 5% (but
not less than 16 or more than
80) random sample of the en-
tire inventory. Make sure that
there is at least one boot from
each cell in the sample.
In-Use Range
(Nm)
Twist Forward Lean
17-31 64-120
31-58 120-229
43-78 165-320
10/14/10 4:28 PM
 Binding
Rental Visual & Mechanical Inspection > (continued)
Inspection Procedures (continued)
Preseason Boot Inspection
The procedure that follows helps to
assure both boot/binding compat-
ibility and boot interchange ability.
Note: when using Table A, in the
Boot Inspection procedures that
follow, the Sole Length and Release
Indicator Setting columns should
be ignored.
1. Randomly select a pair of
bindings that have passed the
preseason inspection from each
binding type; adult, junior, child.
2. Lubricate all boot/binding con-
tact points with a mild liquid
detergent.
3. Without regard to whether the
boot is new or used, sort the
sample by sole type and length
Inseason Sampling And Inspection
The Inseason Inspection is a test of
complete systems and all the pro-
cedures used by the rental staff to
assemble and adjust the system.
The program uses random samples
of rental inventory taken at routine
intervals. Any sampling program
that gives every unit of inventory
the same chance as every other of
being picked is valid.
Sample Frequency
Random sampling is conducted
throughout the entire season.
Frequency is as follows:
1. After 7 days of operation.
2. If the sample passes, the next
sampling is taken after another 7
days of operation.
3. If two consecutive samples pass,
sampling frequency is increased
to 14 days.
4. If a sample fails at any time,
daily sampling is instituted until
two consecutive samples pass,
at which point weekly sampling
resumes.
Demo Inspections > Incomplete Systems
Skis
Bindings intended for demo appli-
cations, where customers supply
their own boots, must be inspected
using the procedures described
for rental equipment. Whenever a
demo or rental binding is used with
a customer’s own boot, inspect the
SPM 11 EN.indb 27
Rental & Demo > Inspection > 27
according to the 20mm Sole
Length Categories defined by
the binding manufacturer’s
Release Value Selection.
4. In each Sole Length Category
rank the boots by sole length
and select the middle boot.
5. In each Sole Length Category fit
the appropriate reference bind-
ings to this “typical” boot and
adjust the two bindings to re-
lease as close as practical to the
Reference Torque in Table A.
Use the Reference Torque cor-
responding to Skier Code [L]
for the Adult binding, [J] for the
Junior binding, and [J] for the
Child binding.
Sample Size
Sample size is 5% of inventory but
not less than 16 nor more than 80
units as noted in Table B. Sample
size is based on average daily out-
put. If rental output drops below
50% of capacity over the sampling
period, the sample size can be re-
duced proportionately.
Inseason Inspection
1. Take a random sample of the
rental inventory as determined
by Table B. Take half the sample
from inventory as it is either
rented or returned and the re-
mainder from inventory avail-
able for rental.
2. Wipe the boot clean and cycle
the boot/binding systems at
least once in each direction.
3. Test sample units in Twist (one
direction only) and Forward Lean.
4. Compare the Test Results with
the Inspection Range for the ap-
propriate Skier Code.
5. If the results are within the
Inspection Range, the unit passes.
customer’s boot for Boot/Binding
Compatibility as described on
page 17. Reject any boots that fail
visual inspection. Both boots of
the pair must be inspected and the
boot sole lengths of both boots
verified.
6. Rinse the lubricant from one to set up the Reference Binding
binding and mark it “clean.” (L, J, or F).
Mark the other “lubricated.” 9. Repeat the Visual Check on all
7. Test each boot in the Sole boots that have been set aside,
Length Category with the clean correct any defects noted, and
Reference Binding and then the retest. Remove from inventory
lubricated Reference Binding boots that fail the retest.
in both twist and forward lean 10. Check all other boots from the
(only one direction in twist is same cell (make, model, year,
required for the clean binding). and shell size) as those that
8. Set aside any boots for which failed.
the lubricated Test Result is NOTE: On completion of the pre-
more than 20% less than the season inspection, clean the liquid
clean Test Result in the same detergent from the equipment (and
direction of release or the lubri- lubricate the binding before return-
cated Test Result, in any direc- ing it to service).
tion of release, is outside of the
Inspection Range provided in
Table A for the Skier Code used
6. If the results are outside technical manual following a
Inspection Range but within the failed Inseason Inspection.
In-Use Range, count the unit as 10. Record the date the sample
a Class I Deviation. was tested, the number of units
7. If the results are outside the In- tested, the number of Class I
Use Range, count the unit as a and Class II (or III) Deviations,
Class II Deviation. whether the sample passed or
8. Check elastic travel and visually failed and any actions taken.
inspect the ski brake function, There is no need to record the
interface areas between boot identity of units tested or actual
and binding, including AFD, lug Test Results.
S TEP 5
height adjustment (if appropri-
ate), and forward pressure.
Count any deficiencies as Class
Table B : Sample Size
I Deviations.
9. If more than the maximum Inventory Sample Maximum
Size Size Class I
number of Class I Deviations
(Pairs) (Units) Deviations
given in Table B are found in
100 16 3
the sample, or a single Class II
S TEP 6
Deviation is detected the sample 200 20 4
300
fails and daily sampling must 30 6
be conducted until the problem 400 40 8
that led to the failed sample 500 50 10
is found and corrected. See 600 60 12
the “Troubleshooting” chapter 700 70 14
of the binding manufacturer’s 800 80 16
900 80 16
Boots
Reference
Whenever customers rent boots Page # Section Name
for use with their own skis, the 17 Final Checking
customer’s binding system must 17 Test for Elastic Travel &
be mechanically inspected (us- Return
ing the rental boot) according to 18 Release Value Within
procedures described for retail Specified Range
equipment. 19 Troubleshooting
10/14/10 4:28 PM
 Binding Rental & Demo > Inspection > 28

Rental Visual & Mechanical Inspection > (continued)

Maintenance Records

SKI/BINDING Maintenance Record

Invenory #: Ski Serial #: Binding Model:

Correction Factors Left Ski Right Ski

Technician’s
Inspection

Initials
Visual
Repairs/Service Left Right Twist Twist

Forward

Forward
Date of Service/Inspection

Lean

Lean
Performed
Toe Heel Toe Heel

Legend: Clockwise Counter-clockwise

BOOT Maintenance Record

STEP 5

Invenory #: Boot Model: Sole Length:

Clean Test Lubricated Test
Technician’s
Initials

Date of Norm Compatible All Adjustments/Parts Repairs/Service Twist Twist

Forward

Forward
Lean

Lean

Service/Inspection Interchangeable Functionsl Performed

S TEP 6

Legend: Clockwise Counter-clockwise

SPM 11 EN.indb 28 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding
Skier Instruction, Warning & Record Keeping
Rental Skier Instrucion & Warning
It is the Dealer’s responsibility to adequately assist each rental customer in equipment selection and to prop-
erly fit rental boots. Instructions regarding proper use of equipment must also be given at the time rental
equipment is provided.
When the Certified Technician
signs or initials the Rental Form,
the technician is attesting that all
functional and instructional pro-
cedures have been completed. To
reduce your shop’s liability risk and
to receive indemnification from
Salomon, you must take the fol-
lowing steps when the skier re-
ceives their equipment. (The indi-
vidual picking up the equipment
must be the intended user, or in
the case of a minor, the user’s par-
ent or guardian.)
Rental Record Keeping
Proper rental record keeping is key to your shop’s risk management program. Without a properly filled out
form, including a signed Liability Release Agreement, indemnification from Salomon will not apply.
A Rental Form must be filled out
for each rental transaction (ex-
change of equipment is considered
to be a transaction). A Liability
Release Agreement the same as
or the equivalent to the Salomon
Liability Release Agreement must
be included on the Rental Form.
The skier must read, under­stand,
sign and date this release. A copy
of the properly filled out Rental
Form must be kept on file for five
years or the statute of limitations
of the state or province, whichever
is longer. Multiple skier forms that
allow each skier to read and sign
the same form may be used if the
form meets the requirements out-
lined in this section. It is recom-
mended that the form be reviewed
by Salomon’s Legal department
prior to use. The person who signs
the rental form must be the skier
who is going to use the rental
equipment. In the case of a minor
skier, the signature on the form
must be that of the skier’s parent
or legal guardian.
SPM 11 EN.indb 29
Rental & Demo > Record Keeping > 29
1. Show how to step into the bind-
ing.
2. Show how to step out of the
binding.
3. Point out the visual indicator
settings on the binding’s toe
and heel pieces. The skier must
verify that these settings agree
with the settings recorded on
the Rental Form.
4. Ask the skier to read the
Liability Release Agreement.
Point out that the skier is sign-
ing a release that limits liabil-
The following is a list of informa-
tion that should be recorded for
every rental transaction. It is not
necessary to use a Salomon Rental
Form, but any form that the shop
uses must include the informa-
tion* listed below. Without this
information*, indemnification will
not apply.
1. *Rental dates.
2. *Name and home address of
the skier.
3. Skier’s home phone number.
4. Skier’s identification.
5. *Skier’s height, weight, age,
and skier type.
6. *Boots' inventory number. (If
the skier is using their own
boots, the boot brand, model
and sole length must be in-
dicated on the Rental Form
and the boot must pass visual
examination.)
7. *Skis' inventory number. (If
the skier is using their own
skis, the system would fall
under Retail guidelines and a
complete system inspection,
ity. Included in this Liability
Release Agreement is the
specific warning that bindings
will not release under all cir-
cumstances where release may
prevent injury or death, nor is it
possible to predict every situa-
tion in which they will release,
and are, therefore, no guarantee
of safety.
5. The skier must understand that
there are inherent and other
risks in the sport of skiing.
including a mechanical inspec-
tion, must be performed and
documented on a Workshop
Form.)
8. *Visual Indicator Settings.
9. *Salomon Certified
Technician’s signature or ini-
tials attesting that all required
procedures have been com-
pleted.
10. Rental fee.
11. *Liability Release Agreement
that is either the same as, or
the substantial equivalent of,
the Salomon release. Consult
your shop’s legal advisor to
be sure the language and type
size of this agreement con-
forms to state or provincial
law. If a form other than the
Salomon form is used, the
language shall accomplish
the same purpose and have
the same legal effect as the
language contained in the
Salomon agreement.
Note
* On the 2010/2011 Salomon Rental
Form, the skier (or in the case of
a minor, the skier’s parent or legal
guardian) must sign and date the
Liability Release Agreement.
6. The skier* must then sign and
date the Rental Form.
7. The skier must be given a copy
of the rental form that includes
a signed copy of the Liability
Release Agreement.
12. *Skier’s signature (in the case
of a minor skier, the signa-
ture on the form must be that
of the skier’s parent or legal
guardian) and date attesting
that the skier:
a. Has been instructed in the
proper use of the equip-
ment.
b. Has verified that the visual
indicator settings corre-
spond to the recorded visual
indicator settings.
c. Has read and understands
the Rental and Liability
Release Agreement on the
rental form, releasing the
shop from liability.
S TEP 7
Reference
Page # Section Name
17 Final Checking & System
Inspection
30 Salomon Rental Form
30 Equipment Rental
& Liability Release
Agreement
31 Post Accident Ski
Equipment Inspection
Report
10/14/10 4:28 PM
 Binding Rental & Demo > Record Keeping > 30

Skier Instruction, Warning & Record Keeping

PLEASE PRINT CLEARLY
(shaded areas for shop use only)
Salomon Rental Form*
Date Date
Out: Due:

Total Rental Days:

Last First M.I.
Downhill Skiing
Name: Indicate skier type

Street T H

City State Zip Snowboard

Phone # Stance: (check one)
Local Accommodations
Regular Goofy
Driver’s Lic.# State

Your Weight Lbs. Your Height ft. in. Age

Acknowledgement of Personal Information & Equipment Instructions
I have accurately represented the above listed information and it is true and correct. I will not use any of the equipment to be provided to
me during this transaction until I have received instruction on its use and function. I agree to verify that the visual indicator settings to be
recorded on this form for downhill ski equipment, and skiboards equipped with release bindings, agree with the number appearing in the
visual indicator windows of the equipment to be listed on this form.

Equipment User’s Signature: Parent/Guardian Signature (if required):

Boot I.D.# Sole Length & Synchro # (Downhill Skiing):

Ski/Board I.D.# Pole Code:
Visual Indicator Settings Requested Settings Equipment Subtotal: $
L Toe R Toe L Toe R Toe
L Heel R Heel L Heel R Heel
Equipment Damage Protection: $
Total: $
Technician’s Signature:

EQUIPMENT RENTAL & LIABILITY RELEASE AGREEMENT

I accept for use AS IS the equipment listed on this form, and accept full financial responsibility for the care of the equipment
while it is in my possession. I will be responsible for the replacement at full value of any equipment rented under this form,
but not returned to the rental facility. I agree to return all rental equipment by the agreed date.
I understand that the binding system cannot guarantee the user’s safety. In downhill skiing, and skiboarding with skiboards
equipped with release bindings, the binding system will not release at all times or under all circumstances where release
may prevent injury or death, nor is it possible to predict every situation in which it will release. In snowboarding,
cross-country skiing, skiboarding with skiboards equipped with non-release bindings, snowshoeing and other sports utilizing
equipment with non-release bindings, the binding system will not ordinarily release during use; these bindings are not
designed to release as a result of forces generated during ordinary operation.
I understand that the sports of skiing, snowboarding, skiboarding, snowshoeing and other sports (collectively "RECREATIONAL
SNOW SPORTS") involve inherent and other risks of INJURY and DEATH. I voluntarily agree to expressly assume all risks of
injury or death that may result from these RECREATIONAL SNOW SPORTS, or which relate in any way to the use of this
equipment.
I understand that a helmet designed for RECREATIONAL SNOW SPORTS use will help reduce the risk of some types of
injuries to the user at slower speeds. I recognize that serious injury or death can result from both low and high energy
impacts, even when a helmet is worn.
I AGREE TO RELEASE AND HOLD HARMLESS the equipment rental facility, its employees, owners, affiliates, agents, officers,
directors, and the equipment manufacturers and distributors and their successors in interest (collectively "PROVIDERS"), from
all liability for injury, death, property loss and damage which results from the equipment user’s participation in the
RECREATIONAL SNOW SPORTS for which the equipment is provided, or which is related in any way to the use of this
equipment, including all liability which results from the NEGLIGENCE of PROVIDERS, or any other person or cause.
I further agree to defend and indemnify PROVIDERS for any loss or damage, including any that results from claims or
lawsuits for personal injury, death, and property loss and damage related in any way to the use of this equipment.
This agreement is governed by the applicable law of this state or province. If any provision of this agreement is determined
S TEP 7

to be unenforceable, all other provisions shall be given full force and effect.
I THE UNDERSIGNED, HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS EQUIPMENT RENTAL & LIABILITY RELEASE AGREEMENT.

User’s Signature: Date:

Parent/Guardian: If equipment user is a minor, I verify that I have the authority to enter into this agreement on behalf of the
equipment user and I agree to be bound by all terms and conditions of this agreement.

Parent/Guardian’s Signature: Date:

Note Reference PARTS

Reference # Item Name
Page # Section Name
* U.S. form shown. The Canadian
equivalent to this form has bilin- 29 Rental Skier Instruction & B1RSFM (U.S.) Salomon Rental Form
gual content. Warning B10019 (CAN) Salomon Rental Form

SPM 11 EN.indb 30 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding
Skier Instruction, Warning & Record Keeping
Post Accident Ski Equipment Inspection Report Form
A Post Accident Ski Equipment Inspection Report Form the same as or equivalent to the form provided must be
filled out if a person returns the equipment, whether the equipment is theirs or belongs to someone else, and
claims that they or someone else were injured. The report must be completed with “as is” mechanical inspection
measured release values. An insufficient or improperly completed form may cause denial of indemnification.
Inspection Report Instructions
General Information
• All information should be printed
clearly.
• Any mistakes should be corrected
and initialed.
• If information is unknown, mark
UNK in the appropriate area.
• If information does not apply, mark
N/A in the appropriate area.
Skier Information Section
• Skier information should be taken
from the rental or workshop form.
• Accident/injury information should
be taken from the ski patrol acci-
dent report (if available).
Equipment Information Section
• Information should be taken from
the visual inspection of equipment.
Equipment Inspection/Tests
Section
• Refer to the most current Shop
Practices Manual for Standard
Boot Sole information.
• Equipment inspections should be
conducted on the equipment “as
is”.
• Inspection of binding adjust-
ments should be in accordance
with recommendations set forth in
the most current Shop Practices
Manual.
• System visual inspections should
be in accordance with recommen-
dations set forth in the most cur-
rent Shop Practices Manual.
• Mechanical inspection tests should
be conducted at room temperature.
• The mechanical testing device
should be properly calibrated and
operated in the manner recom-
mended by the device manufac-
turer.
• Mechanical tests should be con-
ducted on the equipment “as is”.
• Test results should be recorded in
Newton meters.
Facility/Personnel/Testing Device
Section
• The “Inspection Technician” should
be a current Salomon
Certified Technician.
• The report should be reviewed by
the shop manager.
SPM 11 EN.indb 31
Rental & Demo > Record Keeping > 31
Post Accident Ski Equipment Workshop/Rental Form No.
Inspection Report
Skier Information
NAME vACCIDENT DATE
HEIGHT vWEIGHT vAGE vSEX (circle one) vSKIER TYPE (circle one)
M F 1 2 3 -1 3+
INJURY
RIGHT OR LEFT (circle one) vSKI AREA
R L
Equipment Information
vMODEL vLENGTH
SKI MAKE
SERIAL No. vRENTAL I.D. No. (if applicable)
vMODEL vSIZE
BOOT MAKE
BOOT SOLE LENGTH in mm vRENTAL I.D. No. (if applicable)
BINDING MAKE vMODEL
TOE VISUAL INDICATOR (DIN) SCALE vHEEL VISUAL INDICATOR (DIN) SCALE
to to
RENTAL FORWARD PRESSURE (SYNCHRO) SETTING(S):
Equipment Inspection/Tests
Right Ski/Binding/Boot Left Ski/Binding/Boot
N/A YES NO (check one) N/A YES NO (check one)
Boot sole within Industry Norm Standards Boot sole within Industry Norm Standards
All boot parts present, working correctly All boot parts present, working correctly
AFD OK and intact AFD OK and intact
Forward Pressure correct Forward Pressure correct
Toe Height correct Toe Height correct
Toe Wings set correctly Toe Wings set correctly
Brake fully functional Brake fully functional
Ski damaged (bent etc.) Ski damaged (bent etc.)
System passes visual inspections System passes visual inspections
Rental heel forward pressure setting correct Rental heel forward pressure setting correct
VISUAL INDICATOR SETTINGS VISUAL INDICATOR SETTINGS
Toe: Heel: Toe: Heel:
S TEP 7
CLOCKWISE TWIST MEASURED RELEASE VALUES* CLOCKWISE TWIST MEASURED RELEASE VALUES*
I II III I II III
COUNTERCLOCKWISE TWIST MEASURED RELEASE VALUES* COUNTERCLOCKWISE TWIST MEASURED RELEASE VALUES*
I II III I II III
FORWARD LEAN MEASURED RELEASE VALUES* FORWARD LEAN MEASURED RELEASE VALUES*
I II III I II III
* Record the number of results recommended by the manufacturer of the testing device. If not certain, record 3 values for each test.
Facility/Personnel/Testing Device
SHOP NAME vINSPECTION TECHNICIAN vDATE
REPORT REVIEWED BY vDATE vTESTING DEVICE BRAND v­MODEL
10/14/10 4:28 PM
 Binding
Binding Maintenance
& Repair
All Salomon bindings have
replaceable AFDs
Maintenance & Repair
Any incorrect use of a Salomon part or accessory or i­nstallation of a non-compatible brand accessory with a
Salomon system will automatically void both the warranty and indemnification for that system.
Retail & Rental Guidelines
Retail Guidelines
Salomon bindings require a mini-
mum of maintenance to enhance
performance and their useful life.
They should be cleaned, inspected
and lubricated prior to each season
and every 30 skier days per season
as follows:
• Inspect all components for dam-
age or excessive wear. Repair or
Rental Guidelines
Proper maintenance of rental systems
includes a complete inspection of the
entire rental inventory prior to the ski
season. Bindings should be cleaned,
inspected and lubricated in the follow-
ing manner:
• Inspect all components of each
set for damage or excessive wear.
Repair or replace damaged or ex-
cessively worn parts and/or compo-
nents.
• Remove the heel by sliding the hous-
ing off the rear of the heeltrack*.
Cants > Acceptable Use
Salomon bindings should not be altered in any way except as explicitly outlined in this manual.
The use of cants with Salomon bindings is acceptable, provided:
• The cants are of a high grade ma-
terial designed for this use.
• The cants are installed in a profes-
sional manner.
SPM 11 EN.indb 32
replace damaged or excessively
worn parts and/or ­components.
• Clean the exposed areas of the
components with a cloth or rag.
Wipe any dirt or grit from the
binding housings, heel track and
the region under the heel cup. Do
not use solvents or high pressure
• C lean the exposed areas of the com-
ponents with a cloth or rag. Wipe
any dirt or grit from the binding
housings, heel track and the region
under the heel cup. Do not use sol-
vents or high pressure liquid clean-
ing systems to clean bindings.
• Apply Salomon Grease (Ref.
#000905) or the equivalent to the
lubrication points indicated for each
model. Do not use silicone or pen-
etrating oils unless the lubricant is
specifically approved.
• Proper screw penetration into the
ski meets current norms.
• The cants do not impede the bind-
ing’s function as it was designed,
Maintenance & Repair > 32
liquid cleaning systems to clean
bindings.
• Apply Salomon Grease (Ref.
#000905) or the equivalent to the
lubrica­tion points indicated for
the appropriate model. Do not use
silicone or penetrating oils unless
the lubricant is specifically ap-
proved.
• R eplace the heel on the track.
• This should be followed by periodic
in-season inspections and when a
binding looks particularly dirty or if
visual inspection reveals that some-
thing may be wrong. This helps
to ensure that all components are
functioning correctly.
Never attempt to interchange any SR,
SC or retail toe baseplates or heel
tracks with other model baseplates or
heel tracks.
including proper function of the
brake.
Photo: Alexander Klun. Skier: Kaj Zackrisson.
• R
 ecommend to the skier that
routine maintenance and inspec-
tions be performed by a Salomon
Authorized Dealer. This will help
ensure that any problem that
may develop with the system can
be detected and corrected by a
trained technician.
Rental Post Season Storage
To prepare rental equipment for sum-
mer storage:
• All binding visual indicator adjust-
ments should be reduced to the low-
est setting. Do not attempt to adjust
the release setting below the lowest
setting as damage may result.
• The binding heels should be stored
in the closed position.
• The equipment should be stored in
a cool, dry and ventilated area away
from direct sunlight.
Note
* To remove heel pieces on tracks
with heel locks, loosen the rear
mounting screws at least three
turns. Pull the heel piece back­ward
while lifting it up over the heel
lock. To replace the heel pieces,
follow the removal proce­dure in re-
verse and tighten the rear mount-
ing screws securely.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
 Binding
Maintenance & Repair > (continued)
Screw Extractor/Repair Kit
A Follow instructions for the installa-
Salomon offers a Screw Extractor/
Repair Kit (Ref. #000878) to re-
move/ replace broken binding
mounting screws. The kit comes
with two different length bits and
a quantity of repair plugs. Fig. A
Repair plugs may be ordered sepa-
rately.
AFD/SCP Replacement
TZ 5, TZ 5 SC & LZ 7-8-9 Anti Friction Plate Replacement
A S
1. Insert a 6-8 mm wide screwdriver
at the front of the plate. Fig. A
2. Move over the screwdriver to
eject the plate. Fig. S
3. Place the new plate and hand clip
it. Fig. D & F
Junior Performance AFD Upgrade
TZ 5, TZ 5 SC, TC45 bindings were
developed to fit both adult and junior
boot standards, and are delivered with
Other Models
1. Dismount the toe piece from the interface or from the ski.
2. Remove the AFD from the toe piece baseplate.
3. Position the replacement AFD on the baseplate and press it into place.
4. Remount the toe piece.
SCP Reference Numbers
SCP Ref. N° Binding / System
78830001 914 FIS 20 / 914
Z12 Ti, Z12, Z12 Ti SC,
Z10 Ti Axe+, Z10 TI,
78830101 Z10 FIS 20, Z10 Ti SC,
Z10, 710 Ti, 710 SC,
710, 710 ITF.
78829401 Smartrak Prolink +914
Smartrak Prolink &
78829501 Smartrak Control+ Z14,
Z12, Z10, 711
Smartrak Prolink &
78829601 Smartrak Control+ Z12
Ti, Z10 Ti, 710 Ti
SPM 11 EN.indb 33
Maintenance & Repair > Guidelines > 33
Stripped Screw Holes
tion of repair plugs (below).
Broken Screw or Broken Tap
Removal
When a screw or tap breaks in a
ski, it must be removed to avoid
further damage. It can be removed
as follows:
Fit the extractor drill bit into the
electric drill with the shoulder
touching the chuck.
Position the appropriate jig onto
the ski with the jig bushing directly
over the broken screw or tap.
Drill slowly around the broken
piece using an up-and-down move-
D F
a universal junior pedal which has
been validated by dealers and the TÜV
organization. Salomon also offers
a specific Junior Performance AFD
(ref. 89267001) upgrade meant to
increase slope performance for junior
specialists, which can be exchanged
with the universal one. NOTE: The re-
placement junior pedal (red) must be
used only with junior boot standards.
Note
For instructions on replacing the
AFD on Quadrax models, please refer
to the 2006-2007 Salomon Shop
Practices Manual
For instructions on replacing the AFD
on Spheric Performance and S710 Ti
Spheric models, please refer to the
2005-2006 Salomon Shop Practices
Manual
ment to let the shavings escape.
Use caution not to hit the broken
piece.
Continue to drill until the chuck
touches the bushings of the jig.
This is the correct drilling depth
of 10 mm.
Remove the broken piece inside the
extractor bit with a pair of pliers.
Turn the ski over and hit the base
lightly to remove all shavings.
Follow instructions for the installa-
tion of repair plugs (below).
Re-mount the binding.
Clean the extractor bit after each
use.
G NI
OR
JU
!
IOR
JUN
Fig. G Specifically, it may only be
used with junior boots with a toe
thickness of 16.5 +/- 1.5 mm.
Caution: for models with elastic pedal
(range 08), check the presence of the
elastic block under the pedal. Fig. H
Salomon Control Pedal Replacement
All Salomon bindings have replaceable
SCPs. The specific SCP item numbers
can be found in the Salomon Spare
Parts catalog (page 70), though some
SCP Reference Numbers are listed in
the chart below..
Replacement procedures for SCPs
are as follows.
For Toes mounted on Interfaces and
Skis (Smartrak Grip/Grip Plus, SC,
and ITF)
1. Dismount the Toe piece from the
Ski or The Interface by completely
loosening the mounting screws.
2. Dismount manually the SCP on
the Toe piece.
3. Take the new SCP and mount it
manually under the Toe piece.
Installation of repair plugs
The existing hole may need to be
widened using an 8 mm diameter
bit, however do not drill more than
10 mm deep.
Place a drop of glue onto the top
of the hole.
Tap a repair plug into the hole with
a hammer until it is flush with the
topskin of the ski.
PARTS (see page 70)
Reference # Item Name
000905 Salomon Grease
000878 Screw Extractor/Repair Kit
000846 Repair Plugs
H
Reference
Page # Section Name
47 Standard Boot Sole
Dimensions
PARTS (see page 70)
Reference # Item Name
54834001 TZ 5/TZ 5 SC Universal AFD
89267001 TZ 5/TZ 5 SC Junior AFD
4. Tighten the Toe piece on the ski or
the Interface (4Nm torque).
For Toes mounted on Smartrak
Prolink/Control/Response
1. Put the Toe Piece out the
Interface.
2. Dismount the Toe piece from the
Set by completely loosening the
mounting screws.
3. Dismount manually the
SCP+Stirrup on the toe piece.
4. Take the new Set SCP+Stirrup and
mount it manually under the Toe
piece.
5. Tighten the Toe piece on the
Stirrup (4Nm torque).
6. Remount the Toe piece on the
Interface.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
 Binding Certification > Exam > 34

Certification Program
The technician who signs the Authorized
Location’s workshop or rental form for any
transaction must be currently Salomon
alpine binding certified

Photo: Mattias Fredriksson.

Technician Certification Exam
2010/2011 Technician Certification Exam Questions
Do not write on this form. Indicate answers on the Registration Form.
A score of 90%, or 23 correct answers, must be obtained to pass. In addition, questions 12 to 25 are
considered core questions and must be answered correctly.
1 Indemnified Bindings are:
a) Those that appear on the 2010/2011 Schedule of Indemnified Bindings
in the Salomon Shop Practices Manual.
b) The 2010/2011 models only.
c) Not something a technician needs to know about.
d) Any Salomon binding still in use.
2 Salomon Technician Certification:
a) Never has to be renewed. Once you’ve past the exam.
b) Is valid whether or not the employer is a Salomon Authorized Alpine
Binding Dealer.
c) Is valid for 2 years from the exam date and may be transferred
between Salomon Authorized Alpine Binding Dealers.
d) Does not require that Certified Technicians be familiar with Salomon
Bindings through hands-on experience.
3 What is Skier Type?
a) Unnecessary information.
b) A classification system based on “cautious,” “moderate,” or
“aggressive” skiing preferences.
c) The degree of skill a skier possesses.
d) A person who enjoys skiing.
4 When a skier picks up their equipment from your shop make sure:
a) You wish them luck.
b) You only hand it over to the intended user.
c) Someone explains the use of the equipment to them and provides
them with signed copies of the Workshop/Rental Form and Liability
Release Agreement.
d) They speak with the technician who did the installation/adjustment.
5 A mechanical testing device:
a) Never needs re-calibration.
b) Requires properly trained technicians for consistent results.
c) Gives consistent results even when it is operated incorrectly.
d) Is only used in rental shops.
6 When is the forward pressure correct on the ZZ LAB and STH 12, 14 & 16.
a) When the boot in the binding, adjust DIN number.
b) Place boot in binding and center with mid boot mark.
c) When the boot is in the binding and the top of the head screw is
aligned with the back of the heel track.
d) Thereís no need for adjustment it is automatic.
7 Mechanical inspections of rental equipment:
a) Ensure that all components are functioning properly.
b) Are required periodically in-season.
c) Are required pre-season .
d) All of the above.
8 Workshop or Rental Forms must:
a) Be kept on file for 5 years or for the statute of limitations.
b) Be signed by the customer and the Certified Technician.
c) Be used for every transaction.
d) All of the above.
9 A Post Accident Ski Equipment Inspection Report form:
a) Is a critical tool in defending liability claims.
b) Must be completed each time an accident is reported.
c) Answers A and B.
d) Is only necessary in the case of lower body injuries.
10 If the mid-sole indicator on a Salomon jig and the mid-sole indicator on a
boot do not agree, you should:
a) Not install the binding.
b) Leave the boot in the jig and use the mid-sole mark on the boot to
position the jig on the ski.
c) Use the mid-sole mark on the jig to position it on the ski.
d) Position the jig by splitting the difference between the two marks.
11 When adjusting the toe height on Salomon Quadrax (Leisure) bindings,
you should:
a) Use a Salomon rental adjustment tool for the toe height screw.
b) Check your adjustment with a Salomon toe height card.
c) Answers A & B.
d) None of the above; toe height adjustment is automatic.

SPM 11 EN.indb 34 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding Certification > Exam > 35

Technician Certification Exam > (continued)

2010/2011 Technician Certification Exam Questions (continued)
12 What should the initial visual indicator setting be for a 220 lb, 6’5”, 19 If the mid-sole indicator on a Salomon jig and the mid-sole indicator on a
Type 3+ skier who is 25 years old and uses boots with a sole length of boot do not agree, you should:
310 mm? a) Leave the boot in the jig and use the mid-sole mark on the boot to
a) 11 b) Ask the customer. position the jig on the ski.
c) Not possible to determine. d) 12 b) Use the mid-sole mark on the jig to position it on the ski.
c) Position the jig by splitting the difference between the two marks.
13 When testing the toe for elastic travel and return, the boot should:
d) Not install the binding.
a) Elastic travel only occurs while skiing and cannot be tested in the
shop. 20 If the forward pressure indicators on the heel are not aligning properly
b) Move off center at least 5 mm and return to within 2 mm of its original you should:
position. a) Ignore it if they are close.
c) Move slightly off center then release completely. b) Remove the boot and move the heel forward or back to correct.
d) None of the above. c) Make sure (adjustable) toe wings and toe height are correct.
d) Answers B & C.
14 A skier weighs 165 lb and measures 5’8” tall. He is a Type 1 skier who is
59 years old. What is his Skier Code on the Chart? 21 You are testing a used boot-binding system on a mechanical testing
a) H b) J device. The Salomon binding has a visual indicator setting of 6 and the
c) L d) K boot sole is 320 mm long. What is the In-use Range for twist?
a) 58 Newton meters b) 58 to 78 Nm
15 When mounting bindings, Salomonís recommendation for tapping is:
c) 43 to 78 Nm d) 50 to 67 Nm
a) Always tap.
b) Always tap unless the manufacturer cautions against it. 22 If there are no manufacturerís recommendations for drill bit selection
c) Never tap. Itís too easy to damage the ski or break the tap. you should:
d) If you countersink the holes with the drill bit, there is no need to tap. a) Drill the ski with the bit in your drill, you can’t go wrong.
b) Use a 3.6 mm bit, you can always increase the torque on the screw-
16 Skiers requesting personal settings higher or lower than are indicated by
shooter.
the 2010/2011 Salomon Adjustment Chart should:
c) Drill one hole with a 3.6 mm bit and check for metal before switching
a) Be given the settings they want provided they sign a Requested
to a 4.1 mm bit.
Setting Release Agreement.
d) Always use a 4.1 mm bit, all mounting platforms contain metal.
b) Be asked if they wish to identify themselves as Type 3+ or Type -1 and
use the indicated settings. 23 What is the correct maintenance procedure for Salomon binding?
c) Be instructed to adjust their bindings themselves. a) Cleaning all exposed area of the components with a cloth or rag,
d) Answer A or B. cleaning binding housing, heel tracks and apply grease.
b) You may use any solvent or high pressure liquids to clean bindings.
17 A six year old is being fitted for her first pair of skis. She weighs 42 lb.
c) Bindings are self cleaning and do not need maintenance at any time.
What Skier Code would you use to help determine the visual indicator
d) None of the above.
setting of her bindings?
a) B b) A 24 What should the visual indicator setting be for a skier who weighs 69 kg,
c) -1 d) 3/4 height 152 cm, boot sole length 310 mm, skier type II, age 52?
a) 3 b) 3.5
18 A boot is considered incompatible with a Salomon binding if:
c) 4 d) 4.5
a) It does not pass visual inspection.
b) There is more than a I mm difference in sole flatness across its width. 25 Examples of Salomon bindings that may be used with both junior & adult
c) It does not conform to Standard Boot Sole Dimensions. boot sole norms are:
d) All of the above. a) 607 & 608
b) STH 12 & STH 16
c) TZ 5 & C305
d) You canít use an adult norm sole with a Salomon junior binding.

On-line Registration Instructions

Applying technicians must complete the 2010/2011 Salomon on-line certification registration and test.
A score of at least 90% (23 correct answers) must be achieved to pass the exam. Applying technicians are
not certified until a passing score is achieved.
• U.S. dealers will find the on-line cer- • The U.S. fee is $20 for each Registration/ • Canadian dealers will find the on-line
tification registration and test at: Exam submitted by mail or fax to Salomon, certification registration and test at:
http://www.salomoncertification.com or for technicians certified by any approved http://www.salomonhookup.ca
• For the U.S., a $12 fee will be invoiced for industry training program.
each Registration and Exam submitted on line Fax: (801) 334-4502
at www.salomoncertification.com Salomon Certification/ Customer Service
Salomon USA
2030 Lincoln Ave
Ogden, UT 84401

SPM 11 EN.indb 35 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding Adjustment Chart > 36

Torque Range
(Newton Meters)

Inspection Range

In-use Range
2010/2011 ADJUSTMENT CHART REF.

Skier Initial Toe/Heel Indicator Twist Forward

by Boot Sole Length (mm) Lean
Weight Height Skier <- 231- 251- 271- 291- 311- 331- >-
lb kg ft-in/cm Code* 230 mm 250 mm 270 mm 290 mm 310 mm 330 mm 350 mm 351 mm 5 18
22- 10- 3/ 3/ 3/
29 13 A 4 4 4 8 29
30- 14- 3/ 3/ 3/
38 17 B 1 4 4 4 11 40
39-
47
18-
21 C 11/2 11/4 11/4 1 14 52
48-
56
22-
25 D 2 13/4 11/2 11/2 11/4 17 64
57-
66
26-
30 E 21/2 21/4 2 13/4 11/2 11/2 20 75
67-
78
31-
35 F 3 23/4 21/2 21/4 2 13/4 13/4 23 87
79-
91
36-
41 G 31/2 3 23/4 21/2 21/4 2 27 102
<- 4'10"
92-
107
42-
48 <- 148 cm H 31/2 3 3 23/4 21/2 31 120
108-
125
49- 4'11"-5'1"
57 149-157 cm I 41/2 4 31/2 31/2 3 37 141
126-
147
58- 5'2"-5'5"
66 158-166 cm J 51/2 5 41/2 4 31/2 3 43 165
148-
174
67-
78
5'6"-5'10"
167-178 cm K 61/2 6 51/2 5 41/2 4 50 194
175-
209
79- 5'11"-6'4"
94 179-194 cm L 71/2 7 61/2 6 51/2 5 58 229
>- >- >- 6'5"
210 95 >- 195 cm M 81/2 8 7 61/2 6 67 271
N 10 91/2 81/2 8 71/2 78 320
O 111/2 11 10 91/2 9 91 380
P 12 11 101/2 105 452
121 520
* Based on "Type 1" Skier 137 588

SPM 11 EN.indb 36 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Binding 37

Technician Certification Answer Form

2010/2011 Technician Certification Answer Form

This form is for U.S. dealers only.

Get all your certification needs
at www.salomoncertification.com

Fees
On line certification test: $12 Faxed or mailed test: $20

Technician & Store Information

Exam Date Technician’s Name (PRINT CLEARLY)

Store Account # Store Name

Shop Phone # Store Address

Instructions
Please print clearly your information above and fax or mail your Certification Answers to (801) 334-4502.
A score of 90%, or 23 correct answers, must be obtained to pass.
In addition, questions 12 to 25 are considered core questions and must be answered correctly.

Please circle your answer for each question.

All answers must be clearly marked. Any partially circled answers could be marked incorrect.

Answer Section

a b c d a b c d a b c d a b c d a b c d

a b c d a b c d a b c d a b c d a b c d

a b c d a b c d a b c d a b c d a b c d

a b c d a b c d a b c d a b c d a b c d

a b c d a b c d a b c d a b c d a b c d

Mail or Fax To:

Salomon Certification
Salomon U.S.A.
2030 Lincoln Ave., Ogden, UT 84401
Fax: (801) 334-4502
Phone: 1 (800) 654-2668 Technicians Signiture Signiture Date

SPM 11 EN.indb 37 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 ALPINE SKI 38

Technical reference for the

complete line of current
Salomon alpine skis
Photo: Hal Thomson. Skier: Rick Armstrong.

SPM 11 EN.indb 38 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Alpine Ski Technical Features > 39

Adult Ski Length Selection

For the Salomon skis, find the corresponding centimetre length for your weight.
Add to that number any additional length from the boxes below according to your ability, aggressiveness, the snow conditions you ski most of the time and the kind of skis you want to choose.

WEIGHT
Kg < 47 48 - 52 53 - 58 59 - 65 66 - 73 74 - 82 83 >
Corresponding
SKI LENGTH cm 140 cm 145 cm 150 cm 155 cm 160 cm 165 cm 170 cm

LEVEL
1. BEGINNER 2. INTERMEDIATE 3. ADVANCED 4. EXPERT 5. SPECIALIST

You are skiing the first
+ week (rental skis)
- 20 cm
Discover first ski sensations
Able to ski most runs Able to ski all runs Able to ski on all runs Able to ski on all runs in
in good conditions
- 5 cm
in good conditions
+ 0 cm
in any conditions
+ 5 cm
changing conditions
+ 10 cm
Prefer moderate speeds Prefer a variety of speeds Prefer high speeds Prefer highest speeds

TERRAIN

+ Most of the time on groomed piste or on hard snow conditions

+ 0 cm
Most of the time off piste or on soft snow conditions
+ 5 cm
KIND OF SKI
SKI SKI
3V Powerline; 24 Hours; 24 Daytona; 24 Hours Powerline S5; 2V Powerline; Crossmax; 24 Hours Powerline LM; 24 Hours
24 Hours Powerline S3; Select Touch; Vital Touch; Fresh Touch Powerline S1; 24 X / 24 GT Pro / 24 Sport; X-Wing; Rocker / Czar

+ / Shog un / Lord / Knight; El Dictator / Sentinel / Twent y Twelve;

Pro Pipe / Suspect / Threat; Geisha / Lad y / Maï Taï / Vamp;
Origins Diamond, Origins Opal, Origins Topa; Origins Pearl / Origins Amber

- 1 cm + 4 cm
TOTAL

= This total centimetre length is a guide, your preferred length will be the ski closest to the recommended total.

Junior Ski Length Selection

Ski length (and binding) according to weight and height of children*
Child Height 85 to 95 cm 95 to 105 cm 105 to 115 cm 115 to 125 cm 125 to 135 cm 135 to 145 cm 145 to 155 cm 155 to 165 cm 165 to 175 cm
Child Weight* 10 to 14 kg 14 to 18 kg 18 to 22 kg 22 to 26 kg 26 to 30 kg 30 to 37 kg 37 to 45 kg 45 to 55 kg 55 to 65 kg

Approx.
Skiing
Age
Aptitude
of Child
Beginner 70 cm 80 cm
XW Fury Junior XS T5 T5
102861 3 to 7 80 cm
Intermediate
Jade Junior XS 102868 years old T5
24 Junior 111236 Good
Beginner 90 cm 100 cm 110 cm
XW Fury Junior S T5 T5 T5
102860 3 to 7 90 cm 100 cm 110 cm
Jade Junior S 102867 Intermediate T5 T5 T5
years old
24 Junior 111236
Good
Beginner 120 cm 130 cm
XW Fury Junior M T5 L7
102858 6 to 10 120 cm 130 cm
Intermediate
Jade Junior M 102866 years old T5 L7
24 Junior 111237 Good 120 cm 130 cm
T5 L7
Beginner 140 cm 150 cm
XW Fury Junior L L7 L7
102857 8 to 15 140 cm 150 cm
Intermediate
Jade Junior L 102862 years old L7 L7
24 Junior 111237 Good 140 cm 150 cm
L7 L7
Beginner 110 cm 120 cm 130 cm 140 cm
T5 T5 L7 L7
Shogun Junior 111203 6 to 12 110 cm 120 cm 130 cm 140 cm
Intermediate
Mai Tai Junior 111204 years old T5 T5 L7 L7
Good 110 cm 120 cm 130 cm 140 cm
T5 T5 L7 L7
Example for Shogun Junior / Mai Tai Junior: a 6-year-old child weighing 25 kg (and measuring 120 cm), skiing at an intermediate level, must choose a 115 cm ski with a “TZ5” binding.
*If weight is over 45 kg (142 Ibs), SALOMON strongly recommend to use an ADULT ski.

SPM 11 EN.indb 39 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Alpine Ski Technical Features > 40

Drill Bit Selection For Salomon Skis

Ski Model Ski Size Drill Bit Diameter Tapping Glue* Torque
Equipe T, XW Fury Junior, < 140 cm 3,6 mm
3 Nm (for these skis, use a hand screwdriver
Jade Junior, Shogun Junior, No No
>= 140 cm 4,1 mm only to tighten the screws on the bindings.)
Mai Tai Junior
All other models Salomon glue
All sizes 4,1 mm No 4 Nm
(except those above) or epoxy
*Put the glue at the bottome of the hole

Recommendations For Use of Skis According to the Mass of Skier

To guarantee the sufficient param- Group of Ski Skier Weight (kg)
eters of safety (i.e. the resistance of 1 greater than 65 kg
the screws to wrench), skiers must
1, 2 65 kg or less
use skis, approximate with groups 1
1, 2, 3 45 kg or less
to 4, in connection with the mass of
the skier**. (1, 2) 3, 4 25 kg or less
**Extract from NF ISO 8364 June 2007

Ski Technical Reference Chart

TECHNICAL RECAP MEASUREMENTS Option Construction & Core Reinforcement Edges Base Specific Features
SIDECUTS Waist Other

Total Edge Reinforcement

Weight (g per 1/2 pair)

Width
Sandwich Sidewalls
Rocker Shape (mm)

Edgy Monocoque

3D Race Frame
Ref. and
Midsole (mm)

Bamboo layer

XL (85) XL (85) Chassis (mm)

Radius (mm)

Wider Edges
Commercial Designation
Length (cm)

Basalt layer

Double Double Ti Laminate

Waist (mm)

Edge Armor
Monocoque

Body (mm)
Composite

Race Base
All Mtn. All Mtn. Powerline
Full Woodcore
Thickness
Tail (mm)
Tip (mm)

Binding

System

Twintip

4000 Ptex
163 127 82 109 14.0 706 2130 47.0 260
K XW Enduro + 108788 170 127 83 110 15.6 744 2230 47.7 270 Z12 Protrak • T
Wide Sensitive Plate; Oversized Pulse Pad; Square Tail;
Z12 B90 119924 177 127 84 111 17.4 781 2330 48.5 280 All Terrain Rocker; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
184 127 85 112 19.3 816 2430 49.3 290
163 127 82 109 14.0 706 1850 47.0 260
Wide Sensitive Plate; Oversized Pulse Pad; Square Tail;
111687 170 127 83 110 15.6 744 1950 47.7 270

4000
Full

N XW Enduro 177 127 84 111 17.4 781 2050 48.5 280 • T

All Terrain Rocker; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
184 127 85 112 19.3 816 2150 49.3 290
152 120 76 104 11.4 633 2000 46.3
Titanium

159 120 77 105 12.9 668 2070 47.1

Double
Double

K XW Tornado Ti Pl + L (79)
4000
Full

Z12 B 111127 166 120 78 106 15.6 704 2140 47.9 Z12 Protrak T Oversized Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
173 120 79 107 16.3 740 2210 48.7
180 120 80 108 18.2 776 2280 49.5
ALL-MOUNTAIN SKIS: X-Wing

159 120 77 105 12.9 668 1990 47.1

Double
Double

L (79)

K XW Tornado Ti + 111135 166 120 78 106 15.6 704 2060 47.9

4000
Full

Z12 B80 173 120 79 107 16.3 740 2130 48.7 Z12 Protrak T Oversized Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
180 120 80 108 18.2 776 2200 49.5
159 120 77 105 12.9 668 1710 47.1
Double
Double

L (79)

119981 166 120 78 106 15.6 704 1780 47.9

4000
Full

N XW Tornado Ti 173 120 79 107 16.3 740 1850 48.7 T Oversized Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
180 120 80 108 18.2 776 1920 49.5
152 120 73 101 12.0 645 1760
M (75)
Single

K XW Storm + 111136 160 120 74 102 13.6 685 1880

4000

Z11 Smartrak Oversized Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
•
•

Z11 B80 168 120 75 103 15.3 725 2000

176 120 76 104 17.2 766 2120
152 120 73 101 12.0 645 1740
M (75)
Single

H X-Wing 8 + 111137 160 120 74 102 13.6 685 1860

2000

Z10 Lightrak C Oversized Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
•

KZ10 B80 168 120 75 103 15.3 725 1980

176 120 76 104 17.2 766 2100
151 114 72 100 12.2 642 1620
S (72)
Single

H X-Wing 6 + 111139 158 115 72 101 13.2 678 1725

2000

L10 Lightrak C Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
•

JL10 B80 165 116 72 102 14.1 713 1830

172 117 72 103 15.1 749 1935
144 113 72 99 11.4 599 1515
151 114 72 100 12.2 642 1620
S (72)

H X-Wing 4 +
2000

111140 158 115 72 101 13.2 678 1725 L10 Lightrak C Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
•

JL10 B80 165 116 72 102 14.1 713 1830

172 117 72 103 15.1 749 1935
164 112 68 98 16.0 680 2180 49.5
3D Race 3D Race 3D Race 3D Race

Double

K 2V Race Powerline + 120030 171 112 68 98 17.0 721 2250 50.2

Race

4000
Full

Z14 178 112 68 98 17.5 752 2320 51.0 Z14 Protrak T • Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
185 112 68 98 19.0 783 2390 51.8
164 112 68 98 16.0 680 2300 52.5
Double

K 2V Race Powerline + 111101 171 112 68 98 17.0 721 2400 53.2

Race

4000
Full

Z12 178 112 68 98 17.5 752 2500 54.0 Z12 Protrak T • Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
185 112 68 98 19.0 783 2620 54.8
155 117 67 102 11.2 638 2300 44.4
Double

K 3V Race Powerline + 120031 160 118 67 102 12.0 663 2400 45.0
Race

4000
Full

Z14 B75 165 119 67 102 12.5 690 2500 45.6 Z14 Protrak T • Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
170 120 67 102 13.2 720 2620 46.2
155 117 67 102 11.2 638 2130 44.4
Double

K 3V Race Powerline + 111104 160 118 67 102 12.0 663 2230 45.0
Race

4000
Full

Z12 165 119 67 102 12.5 690 2330 45.6 Z12 Protrak T • Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
170 120 67 102 13.2 720 2450 46.2
154 119 70 99 12.1 645 1900 47.4
ON PISTE: Race / Allround

Platinum

Carbon
Double

K Crossmax + 111113 162 119 71 101 13.6 687 1980 48.3

4000
Full

Z12 B75 170 119 72 103 15.1 730 2080 49.2 Z12 Protrak • T Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
178 119 73 105 16.8 774 2180 50.1
154 119 70 99 12.1 645 1900 47.4
Double

K 24 X + 111100 162 119 71 101 13.6 687 1980 48.3

Race

4000
Full

Z12 B75 170 119 72 103 15.1 730 2080 49.2 Z12 Protrak • T Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
178 119 73 105 16.8 774 2180 50.1
154 119 70 99 12.1 645 1900 47.4
Magnesium Magnesium Titanium

Double

K 24 Hours + 111116 162 119 71 101 13.6 687 1980 48.3

4000
Full

Z12 B75 170 119 72 103 15.1 730 2080 49.2 Z12 Protrak • • T Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
178 119 73 105 16.8 774 2180 50.1
148 119 69 101 10.4 611 1720 46.0
K 24 Daytona + 155 119 70 102 11.7 648 1790 45.8
4000

111118 162 119 71 103 13.1 686 1860 47.5 Z11 Smartrak • • Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
•

Z11 B80 169 119 72 104 14.6 725 1930 48.3

176 119 73 105 16.3 765 2000 49.0
144 115 72 98 11.9 606 1575
3D Sport

151 116 72 99 12.8 641 1680

Single

K 24 GT Pro +
4000

111120 158 117 72 100 13.9 676 1785 Z10 Smartrak Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
•

Z10 B80 165 118 72 101 14.8 712 1890

172 119 72 102 15.7 748 1995
144 115 72 98 11.9 606 1535
3D Sport

151 116 72 99 12.8 641 1640

Single
Alium

H 24 Sport +
2000

JL10 B80 111741 158 117 72 100 13.9 676 1745 L10 Lightrak C Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
165 118 72 101 14.8 712 1850
172 119 72 102 15.7 748 1955

SPM 11 EN.indb 40 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Alpine Ski Technical Reference > 41

TECHNICAL RECAP MEASUREMENTS Option Construction & Core Reinforcement Edges Base Specific Features
SIDECUTS Waist Other

Total Edge Reinforcement

Weight (g per 1/2 pair)
Width

Sandwich Sidewalls
Rocker Shape (mm)

Edgy Monocoque

3D Race Frame
Ref. and

Midsole (mm)

Bamboo layer

Chassis (mm)
Radius (mm)

Wider Edges
Commercial Designation

Length (cm)

Basalt layer

Double Double Ti Laminate

Waist (mm)

Edge Armor
3D Race Monocoque

Body (mm)
Composite

Race Base
Alium Magnesium Titanium Race Powerline
Full Woodcore
Thickness
Tail (mm)
Tip (mm)

Binding

System

Twintip

4000 Ptex
155 117 67 102 11.2 638 2300 44.4
K 24 Hours Powerline LM+ 120033 160 118 67 102 12.0 663 2400 45.0 Z14 Protrak T • Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
Z14 165 119 67 102 12.5 690 2500 45.6
170 120 67 102 13.2 720 2620 46.2
ON PISTE: Japanese Demo

154 119 70 99 12.1 645 1900 47.4

K 24 Hours Pwline S5 + 162 119 71 101 13.6 687 1980 48.3

4000
Full
Z12 111471 170 119 72 103 15.1 730 2080 49.2 Z12 Protrak • • T Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
178 119 73 105 16.8 774 2180 50.1
155 119 70 102 11.7 648 1790 45.8
K 24 Hours Pwline S3+ 111467 162 119 71 103 13.1 686 1860 47.5

4000
Z10 Smartrak • • Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector

•
Z10 B 169 119 72 104 14.6 725 1930 48.3
176 119 73 105 16.3 765 2000 49.0
151 116 72 99 12.8 641 1680

Dbl. 3D Sport

Single
H 24 Hours Pwline S1+ 111694 158 117 72 100 13.9 676 1785

2000
L10 165 118 72 101 14.8 712 1890 L10 Lightrak C Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
172 119 72 102 15.7 748 1995
FREESKI: Exploring

4000
Full
N El Dictator 111144 194 139 114 124 43.4 856 2600 300 W T Pulse Pad; Flat Tail; All Terrain Rocker; G1 ISO Norm

•
170 129 93 119 17.8 715 1900 270

Double
111145 177 129 94 120 19.8 754 2000 280

4000
Full
N Sentinel 184 129 95 121 21.1 792 2100 290 • • W T Pulse Pad; Square Tail; All Terrain Rocker; G1 ISO Norm
191 129 96 122 24.3 832 2200 300

4000
Full
N Rocker 111691 192 147 127 137 48.5 840 290 720 W T Flat Tail; Rocker; G1 ISO Norm

•
•
166 125 105 115 38.3 745/775 2020 581

Double
111143 174 128 108 118 40.0 780/810 2120 626

4000
Full
N Czar W T Pulse Pad; High Twin Tip Tail; Rocker; G1 ISO Norm
FREESKI: Big Mountain

•
182 131 111 121 44.7 816/846 2220 670
190 133 114 123 54.9 853/883 2318 670
164 126 97 116 20.6 730 1852 250

Double
102732 173 128 99 118 23.1 770 1944 300

4000
Full
N Shogun • • W T A Pulse Pad; Semi Twin Tip Tail; Rocker; G1 ISO Norm

•
182 130 101 120 25.9 810 2040 350
191 132 103 122 28.7 850 2140 400
161 128 85 113 13.6 706 1690 210
102735 169 128 86 114 15.4 748 1790 210

4000
N Lord W T A Pulse Pad; Semi Twin Tip Tail; Rocker; G1 ISO Norm

•
•
177 128 87 115 17.4 791 1890 210
185 128 88 116 19.5 835 1990 210
151 122 85 14.2 713/738 1560
107490 161 122 85 16.3 740/775 1660

2000
N The Knight 112 C W T Semi Twin Tip Tail; G1 ISO Norm
•
•

171 122 85 18.5 820/855 1760

176 122 85 19.6 851/886 1800
Sandwich

161 122 85 112 15.7 796 1785 Full

N Dumont Pro Pipe 111146 171 122 85 112 18.0 845 1885 • W T • Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm
181 122 85 112 20.5 895 1985
163 123 91 116 17.6 803 1785
FREESKI: Park & Pipe

4000
Full

N Twenty Twelve 111147 171 123 91 116 19.7 843 1885 • • W T Pulse Pad; Twin Rocker FS; G1 ISO Norm
179 123 91 116 21.9 882 1985
151 122 86 115 13.0 692/742 1560
161 122 86 115 15.1 742/792 1650

4000
Full

N Suspect 111148 171 122 86 115 17.3 792/842 1740 • • W T A Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm
176 122 86 115 18.5 817/867 1790
181 122 86 115 19.7 842/892 1840
141 122 85 112 14.0 666/691 1285
151 122 85 112 14.2 713/738 1560

2000
N Threat 102752 161 122 85 112 16.3 740/775 1660 • C W T G1 ISO Norm
•

171 122 85 112 18.5 820/855 1760

176 122 85 112 19.6 851/886 1800
144 115 72 98 11.9 614 1515
Magnesium Titanium

151 116 72 99 12.8 649 1620

Single

H Select Touch +
2000

111161 158 117 72 100 13.9 684 1725 Z10 Ti Lightrak G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
•
•

KZ10 Ti B 165 118 72 101 14.8 720 1830

WOMEN: On piste

172 119 72 102 15.7 756 1935

144 115 72 98 11.9 614 1515
H Vital Touch + 151 116 72 99 12.8 649 1620
2000

111163 158 117 72 100 13.9 684 1725 Z10 Ti Lightrak C G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
•

KZ10 Ti B8 165 118 72 101 14.8 720 1830

172 119 72 102 15.7 756 1935
144 115 72 98 11.9 614 1515
151 116 72 99 12.8 649 1620
Alium

H Fresh Touch +
2000

JL9 B80 111165 158 117 72 100 13.9 684 1725 L9 Lightrak • C G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
165 118 72 101 14.8 720 1830
172 119 72 102 15.7 756 1935
152 120 76 104 11.4 633 1750 46.3
L (79)

K Origins Diamond + 111150 159 120 77 105 12.9 668 1820 47.1
4000
Full

Z10 Ti 166 120 78 106 15.6 704 1890 47.9 Z10 Ti Protrak • T Oversized Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
173 120 79 107 16.3 740 1960 48.7
144 120 72 100 10.5 614 1620
M (75)
Single

H Origins Opal + 111156 152 120 73 101 12.0 653 1740 Oversized Pulse Pad; 3D Stealth Tip; Women Stance
4000

Z10 Ti Lightrak • T
•
•

KZ10 Ti B 160 120 74 102 13.6 693 1860 (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm)); G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
168 120 75 103 15.3 733 1980
144 120 72 100 10.5 614 1620
M (75)
Single

H Origins Topaz + 111154 152 120 73 101 12.0 653 1740 Pulse Pad; Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm));
4000

Z10 Ti Lightrak C •
•

KZ10 Ti 160 120 74 102 13.6 693 1860 G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
168 120 75 103 15.3 733 1980
144 120 72 100 10.5 614 1360
M (75)
Single

Pulse Pad; Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm));

118469 152 120 73 101 12.0 653 1480
4000

N Origins Topaz C •
•

160 120 74 102 13.6 693 1600 G1 ISO Norm; Tip Protector
WOMEN: All-Mountain

168 120 75 103 15.3 733 1720

137 112 72 98 10.5 581 1410
144 113 72 99 11.4 607 1515
S (72)
Single

H Origins Pearl + Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm)); G1 ISO Norm;
2000

111416 151 114 72 100 12.2 650 1620 L9 Lightrak C •

•

JL9 B80 158 115 72 101 13.2 686 1725 Tip Protector
165 116 72 102 14.1 721 1830
137 112 72 98 10.5 581 1410
144 113 72 99 11.4 607 1515
S (72)
Single

H Origins Pearl + Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm)); G1 ISO Norm;
2000

111157 151 114 72 100 12.2 650 1620 L9 Lightrak C •

•

JL9 B80 158 115 72 101 13.2 686 1725 Tip Protector
165 116 72 102 14.1 721 1830
137 112 72 98 10.5 581 1150
144 113 72 99 11.4 607 1255
S (72)
Single

Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm)); G1 ISO Norm;

2000

N Origins Pearl 118468 151 114 72 100 12.2 650 1360 C •

•

158 115 72 101 13.2 686 1465 Tip Protector

165 116 72 102 14.1 721 1570
137 112 72 98 10.5 581 1410
144 113 72 99 11.4 607 1515
S (72)

H Origins Amber + Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm)); G1 ISO Norm;
2000

111159 151 114 72 100 12.2 650 1620 L9 Lightrak C

•

JL9 B80 158 115 72 101 13.2 686 1725 Tip Protector
165 116 72 102 14.1 721 1830
153 124 95 114 18.5 690 1640 225
Double

4000
Full

N Geisha 102734 164 126 97 116 20.6 730 1852 250 • • • W T A Semi Twin Tip Tail; Rocker; G1 ISO Norm
•

173 128 99 118 23.1 770 1944 300

153 128 84 112 11.9 664 1590 210
WOMEN: Freeski

4000
Full

N Lady 102748 161 128 85 113 13.6 706 1690 210 W T A Pulse Pad; Semi Twin Tip Tail; Rocker; G1 ISO Norm
•
•

169 128 86 114 15.4 748 1790 210

151 122 86 115 13.0 692/742 1560
4000
Full

N Mai Tai 111170 161 122 86 115 15.1 742/792 1650 • • W T A Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm ; Wide Body Shape (>– 85 mm)
171 122 86 115 17.3 792/842 1740
141 122 85 112 14.0 666/691 1283
102753 151 122 85 112 14.2 713/738 1560
2000

N Vamp • C W T G1 ISO Norm ; Wide Body Shape (>– 85 mm)

•
•

161 122 85 112 16.3 740/775 1660

171 122 85 112 18.5 820/855 1760

SPM 11 EN.indb 41 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Alpine Ski Technical Reference > 42

TECHNICAL RECAP MEASUREMENTS Option Construction & Core Reinforcement Edges Base Specific Features
SIDECUTS Waist Other

Total Edge Reinforcement

Weight (g per 1/2 pair)
Width

Sandwich Sidewalls
Rocker Shape (mm)

Edgy Monocoque

3D Race Frame
Ref. and

Midsole (mm)

Bamboo layer

Chassis (mm)
Radius (mm)

Wider Edges
Commercial Designation

Length (cm)

Basalt layer

Double Double Double Double Ti Laminate

Waist (mm)

Edge Armor
3D Race 3D Race 3D Race 3D Race Monocoque

Body (mm)
Composite

Race Base
Powerline
Full Woodcore
Thickness
Tail (mm)
Tip (mm)

Binding

System

Twintip

1840 4000 4000 4000 4000 Ptex

J 2V Race Jr + 151 101 64 84 17.0 625 870 12.65
Z11 B75 120035 158 103 64 86 17.0 660 970 13.5 Z11 Smartrak Grip Pulse Pad; G3 ISO Norm
165 105 64 88 17.5 695 1060 14.6
H 2V Race Jr + 130 96 63 80 14.0 540 850 10.9

Full
JL10 Jr B80 111304 137 101 64 83 14.0 575 935 11.6 L10 Jr Lightrak Jr Pulse Pad; G3 ISO Norm
144 104 64 86 14.0 610 1020 12.45
J 3V Race Jr + 120037 144 110 64 93 11.0 595 905 12.8

Full
Z11 Smartrak Grip Pulse Pad; G3 ISO Norm
JUNIOR: On piste Jr

Z11 B75 151 112 64 96 11.5 630 1050 13.64

H 3V Race Jr + 111306 130 105 63 88 10.0 525 920 11.5

Full
JL10 Jr B80 137 108 63 91 10.5 560 980 11.9 L10 Jr Lightrak Jr Pulse Pad; G3 ISO Norm

H 24 Jr + 117955 140 107 65 88 13.0 585 1360 L10 Jr Lightrak C G3 ISO Norm; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Tip Protector

•
JL10 Jr B80 150 108 65 89 14.0 635 1460
120 106 65 86 9.5 485 880
130 107 65 87 11.0 535 1000

1840
N 24 Jr 111237 140 C G3 ISO Norm; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Tip Protector

•
107 65 88 13.0 585 1100
150 108 65 89 14.0 635 1200
70 91 65 75 4.5 300 400
80 96 65 79 5.0 330 440 Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm;

1840
N 24 Jr 111236 90 100 65 83 5.5 365 530 C

•
100 100 65 84 7.0 405 620 Reinforced Structured Top Sheet
110 103 65 86 7.5 450 640
102857 140 107 65 88 13.0 585 1100

1840 1840 1840 1840 1840 1840 1840 1840

N XW Fury Junior L C G3 ISO Norm; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Tip Protector

•
150 108 65 89 14.0 635 1200
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm;
N XW Fury Junior M 102858 120 106 65 86 9.5 485 880 C

•
130 107 65 87 11.0 535 1000 Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Tip Protector
JUNIOR: All-Mountain Jr

90 100 65 83 5.5 365 530 Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm;
N XW Fury Junior S 102860 100 100 65 84 7.0 405 620 C

•
110 103 65 86 7.5 450 640 Reinforced Structured Top Sheet
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm;
N XW Fury Junior XS 102861 70 91 65 75 4.5 300 400 C

•
80 96 65 79 5.0 330 440 Reinforced Structured Top Sheet
N Jade Junior L 140 107
102862 150 65 88 13.0 585 1100 C G3 ISO Norm; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Tip Protector

•
108 65 89 14.0 635 1200
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm;
N Jade Junior M 102866 120 106 65 86 9.5 485 880 C

•
130 107 65 87 11.0 535 1000 Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Tip Protector
90 100 65 83 5.5 365 530 Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm;
N Jade Junior S 102867 100 100 65 84 7.0 405 620 • C
110 103 65 86 7.5 450 640 Reinforced Structured Top Sheet
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm;
N Jade Junior XS 102868 70 91 65 75 4.5 300 400 C
•

80 96 65 79 5.0 330 440 Reinforced Structured Top Sheet

110 92 76 84 19.5 487 715
JUNIOR: Freeski Jr

111203 120 99 78 91 17.0 532 905

1840
N Shogun Jr • C Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm
•

130 106 80 98 15.5 577 1095

140 122 85 112 14.0 666 1285
110 92 76 84 19.5 487 715
111204 120 99 78 91 17.0 532 905

1840
N Mai Tai Jr • C Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm
•

130 106 80 98 15.5 577 1095

140 122 85 112 14.0 666 1285
144 120 72 100 10.5 606 1620
152 120 73 101 12.0 645 1740 Pulse Pad; Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm));

M (75)
HR X-Wing 8 R +

4000
102808 160 120 74 102 13.6 685 1860 Lightrak C • G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet;
•

Lightrak R 168 120 75 103 15.3 725 1980 Reinforced Mat Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base; Tip Protector
176 120 76 104 17.2 766 2100
137 112 72 98 10.5 573 1550
G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Size Color Coding;
111328 144 113 72 99 11.4 599 1655

S (72)
RENTAL: All-Mountain

FR X-Wing 6 R + 151 114 72 100 12.2 642 1760 Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Mat Top Sheet

2000
L10 SC ITF Loc C •
•

L10 SC B80 158 115

111218 165 116
72 101 13.2 678 1865 (only C/O version is concerned); Reinforced Black Base;
72 102 14.1 713 1970 Tip Protector
172 117 72 103 15.1 749 2075
137 112 72 98 10.5 573 1150
144 113 72 99 11.4 599 1255 G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet;
S (72)

102815 151 114 72 100 12.2 642 1360

2000

NR X-Wing 6 R C • Reinforced Mat Top Sheet (only C/O version is concerned);

•

111212 158 115 72 101 13.2 678 1465

165 116 72 102 14.1 713 1570 Reinforced Black Base; Tip Protector
172 117 72 103 15.1 749 1675
111331 125 112 78 102 10.5 556 1580
135 113 74 93 13.0 545 1690 G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Size Color Coding;
M (75)

FR XW Focus + 111467 145 116 74 96 13.5 595 1800

2000

L10 SC ITF Loc C Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base;
•

L10 SC B80 155 119 74 100 14.0 645 1910

165 122 74 103 14.5 695 2020 Tip Protector
119391 175 123 74 107 15.0 755 2130
144 115 72 98 11.9 606 1495
3D Sport

151 116 72 99 12.8 641 1600 Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
HR 24 GT Pro R +
4000

111205 158 117 72 100 13.9 676 1705 Lightrak Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base;
•

Lightrak 165 118 72 101 14.8 712 1810 Tip Protector

172 119 72 102 15.7 748 1915
RENTAL: On piste

144 115 72 98 11.9 606 1635

3D Sport

151 116 72 99 12.8 641 1740 Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Size Color Coding;
FR 24 Sport R +
4000

L10 SC B80 111207 158 117 72 100 13.9 676 1845 L10 SC ITF Loc C Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base;
165 118 72 101 14.8 712 1950 Tip Protector
172 119 72 102 15.7 748 2055
144 115 72 98 11.9 606 1235
151 116 72 99 12.8 641 1340 Pulse Pad; G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
3D Race

4000

NR 24 Sport R 111208 158 117 72 100 13.9 676 1445 C Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base;
165 118 72 101 14.8 712 1550 Tip Protector
172 119 72 102 15.7 748 1655
FR Crossmax 120 + Bar Coding; Size Color Coding; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet;
2000

111209 125 112 78 102 10.5 556 1580 L10 SC ITF Loc C
•

L10 SC B Reinforced Mat Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base; Tip Protector
151 122 85 112 14.2 713/738 1560
RENTAL: Women Rtl R: Freeski

Semi Twin Tip Tail; G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;

111217 161 122 85 112 16.3 740/775 1660
2000

NR The Knight R C W T Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base;

•
•

171 122 85 112 18.5 820/855 1760

176 122 85 112 19.6 851/886 1800 Tip Protector
137 112 72 98 10.5 581 1550
144 113 72 99 11.4 607 1655 Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm));
S (72)

FR Origins Crystal +
4000

111216 151 114 72 100 12.2 650 1760 L10 SC ITF Loc C G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet;
•

L10 SC 158 115 72 101 13.2 686 1865 Reinforced Mat Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base; Tip Protector
165 116 72 102 14.1 721 1970
137 112 72 98 10.5 581 1150
144 113 72 99 11.4 607 1255 Women Stance (Fwd mounted binding (+ 8 mm));
S (72)
4000

NR Origins Crystal R 102820 151 114 72 100 12.2 650 1360 C G1 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet;
•

158 115 72 101 13.2 686 1465 Reinforced Mat Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base; Tip Protector
165 116 72 102 14.1 721 1570
FR 24 Jr R L + 111814 140 107 65 88 13.0 585 1460 G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet;
1840 1840 1840 1840 1840 1840 1840 1840 1840 1840 1840 1840

L7 SC ITF Loc Junior C

•

L7 SC 150 108 65 89 14.0 635 1560 Reinforced Black Base; Tip Protector
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
FR 24 Jr R M + 111817 120 106 65 86 9.5 485 1240 T5 SC ITF Loc Junior C Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base;
•

T5 SC 130 107 65 87 11.0 535 1360

Tip Protector
FR 24 Jr R S + 111820 100 100 65 84 7.0 405 980 T5 SC ITF Loc Junior C
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
•

T5 SC 110 103 65 86 7.5 450 1000 Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base
FR 24 Jr R XS + 70 91 65 75 4.5 300 760 Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
111824 80 96 65 79 5.0 330 800 T5 SR ITF Loc Junior C
•

T5 SR 90 100 65 83 5.5 365 890 Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base
FR XW Fury Junior L + 111815 140 107 65 88 13.0 585 1460 L7 SC ITF Loc Junior C
G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet;
•

L7 S 150 108 65 89 14.0 635 1560 Reinforced Black Base; Tip Protector
RENTAL: Junior Rtl

Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;

FR XW Fury Junior M+ 111822 120 106 65 86 9.5 485 1240 T5 SC ITF Loc Junior C Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base;
•

T5 SC 130 107 65 87 11.0 535 1360

Tip Protector
FR XW Fury Junior S+ 111821 100 100 65 84 7.0 405 980 T5 SC ITF Loc Junior C
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
•

T5 SC 110 103 65 86 7.5 450 1000 Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base
FR XW Fury Junior XS + 70 91 65 75 4.5 300 760 Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
111825 80 96 65 79 5.0 330 800 T5 SR ITF Loc Junior C
•

T5 90 100 65 83 5.5 365 890 Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base
FR Jade Junior L+ 111816 140 107 65 88 13.0 585 1460 L7 SC ITF Loc Junior C
G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding; Reinforced Structured Top Sheet;
•

L7 SC 150 108 65 89 14.0 635 1560 Reinforced Black Base; Tip Protector
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
FR Jade Junior M+ 111818 120 106 65 86 9.5 485 1240 T5 SC ITF Loc Junior C Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base;
•

T5 SC 130 107 65 87 11.0 535 1360

Tip Protector
FR Jade Junior S+ 111819 100 100 65 84 7.0 405 980 T5 SC ITF Loc Junior C
Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
•

T5 SC 110 103 65 86 7.5 450 1000 Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base
FR Jade Junior XS+ 70 91 65 75 4.5 300 760 Screw Length < 6 mm +/- 0,5; G3 ISO Norm; Bar Coding;
111826 80 96 65 79 5.0 330 800 T5 SR ITF Loc Junior C
•

T5 SR 90 100 65 83 5.5 365 890 Reinforced Structured Top Sheet; Reinforced Black Base;

SPM 11 EN.indb 42 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Alpine Ski Maintenance & Repair > 43

Maintenance & Repairs

Ski maintenance
Good ski maintenance is just as important for the recreational skier as for the racer. A fine-tuned ski lasts
longer. A well-prepared ski turns better, grips the snow better and glides better on all types of snow.
The ski tune-up involves three steps:
1. Daily check-up - at the end of everyday of skiing.
2. Machine tuning - for quick work.
3. Complete hand tuning - for skier’s specific needs.

Check-up
• Visually check to see if any rust • Remove any traces with fine, • If necessary, sharpen and polish • Clean the base and wax with
has developed on the edges. 220-230 grit sandpaper. edges using sandpaper wrapped Swix wax.
around a file.

Machine tuning
A S D Fa

Ski check-up Fb
• Visually check to determine what needs to be tuned.
• Remove major deep scratches on edges with whetstone (see page 44 for repairing).
• Remove any traces of wax or grease.
Fill in any holes in the base
(see base repairs on page 45)
Depending on the conditions of the base and materials available:
a) Grind entire base surface. Fig. A Stone grinding
b) Fill-in scratches with base repair material. For Prolink skis, install the Binding-Bridge kit according to the
c) Repair any large damaged areas with base patch/die. Maintenance Specifics paragraph on page 44.
a) Surface smoothing c) Finishing Fig. S
– Place the skis on a flat surface. – Stone grind to obtain a fine struc-
Stone grinding the ski base
Surface Smoothing Semi Finishing Finishing
– Eliminate any excess polyethyl- ture (when using a belt grinding
Grinding Grinding Grinding ene on the base with a hand base machine: use 150 grit belt).
Rotation speed Rotation speed Rotation speed plane to decrease the risks of – Do not use a dirty stone which
1000 t/mn 800 to 900 t/mn 400 to 500 t/mn contaminating the stone. creates fluff/hair.
Pressure 2,5 Pressure 2,5 Minimum Pressure b) Semi Finishing d) Beveled/recessed finish
Ski feed speed Ski feed speed Ski feed speed – Stone grind until the base be- For skis with beveled/recessed finish,
10 m/mn 10 m/mn 10 - 11 m/mn
comes flat and glossy. we recommend a straight, fine
Dressing Dressing Dressing
Dressing rate Dressing rate Dressing rate – Avoid overheating and use of a stone-ground structured base.
9 - 12 mm/s 4 - 16 mm/s 7 - 8 mm/s dirty stone (lengthwise streaks on Note: always make the last run in this
(depending on the condition of the ski)
base are from stone contaminant). direc­tion: Tip – Tail. Concerning
Dressing speed Dressing speed Dressing speed
Micro automatic (1300 t/mn) (1300 t/mn) – Dress the stone regularly to keep the machine parame­ters, consult
(1300t/mn) it in good condition (when using a the machine manufacturer.
Values from Wintersteiger machines (Micro 81 – Micro 91) or equivalent ma- belt grinding machine: use 80 grit
chines. belt).

Ski tuning on beveled/recessed edges Edge finishing

Parameter of the Beveled edge Recessed edge We recommend grinding the edges • Smooth the edges by hand with
machine with a cup grinding wheel. Fig. D a soft stone (Fig. Fa) or Scotch
Program 1 Angle 1° Angle 1° • Check the angle adjustment be- Brite® (Fig. Fb)
Program from Wintersteiger machine (Trim Disc). forehand. • Make sure all burrs are removed
• Make sure the stones are well and smooth down again, if nec-
lubricated. essary.
• Make sure the edges are not For non equiped retailers they
burnt (brown color). can do a classic tuning.
• Check the tuning lengths.

SPM 11 EN.indb 43 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Alpine Ski
Maintenance & Repairs (continued)
Machine tuning (continued)
G H
Lateral finish (Fig. G):
• Lateral finishing with lubricated
220 belt (or use the smallest grit
possible).
• Pass over the edges 1-2 times
depending on the condition of the
edges.
K L
Waxing, scraping and brushing
a) Waxing (Fig. K)
- It’s best to use melted wax.
- Clean the base thoroughly.
- Make sure the iron is set at the ap-
propriate temperature so that only
the wax is melted. (Temperature
110 °C +/- 5 °C or 230 °F +/-
10 °F).
Hand tuning
A true bar is the basic tool for
checking and assessing:
• ski base flatness,
• that the edge is slightly recessed
from the base,
• the extent of base scratches and
appropriate repair. The edge angle
checking tool is used to verify
that the edge has an angle of 90°.
Ski check-up
• Check the base and edges of your
skis with a true bar.
• If repairs are necessary, see in-
structions on page 45.
Cleaning the skis > Warning
Pressurized cleaners are prohibited, as well as the following solvents:
› Acetone
› 95° alcohol
(due to risk of damaging the cosmetics of the top surface of the ski).
SPM 11 EN.indb 44
• A double sided sharpener will
maintain the ski’s proper side cut.
• For a performance preparation,
polish the base edge with a pol­
ish­ing stone or whetstone to
elim­in­ ate any file marks on the
edges.
Excess heat (above 120 °C or 248°F)
can be harmful to both wax and ski,
and can even cause permanent loss
of glide qualities in the base.
- Choose a wax according to the wax
manu­facturer’s recommendations.
- Melt the selected wax over the en-
tire length of the base, and let the
wax cool to room temperature.
Smoothing the base
and edges (Fig. D)
Classic finish: If damage is only mi-
nor, use a file to tune ; otherwise the
ski must be tuned on a machine.
Beveled/Recessed finish: the
recommended bevel is between 1°
and 1.5°.
Edge sharpening (Fig. D)
• Sharpen base edges.
• Sharpen side edges.
On classic finish: make sure the
edges are at 90°.
Maintenance & Repair > 44
J
• Remove burrs and polish edges
with a lubricated Scotch Brite®
belt machine at a slow speed.
Fig. J
• Be careful to lubricate sufficiently
to avoid burning the base.
: Tools:
b) Scraping (Fig. L)
- Remove the excess wax with a
plastic scraper from tip to tail to
leave only a very thin layer.
- Remove wax from the base groove
and ski edges as well.
c) Brushing (Fig. :)
- Brush the base with a nylon brush
(or other type depending on the
On Beveled/Recessed finish: make
sure that the beveled and recessed
edge angle is between 1° and 1.5°.
• Round off the tip and tail slightly.
• Remove any burrs with soft stone
or Scotchbrite®.
Polishing the edges
Polish the edges with a whetstone,
starting first on the base and then
the sides.
Waxing, scraping and
brushing
Follow the same instructions as in
machine tuning.
Maintenance specifics > Prolink adapter
Tuning skis with prolink on au-
tomatically programmable ma-
chines and machines with a lead:
To be able to tune skis with the Y
and V prolink, we have developed
a specific tuning kit in cooperation
with the Wintersteiger company.
• Carefully remove all burrs with a
soft stone.
• Quickly wipe the ski to avoid
staining from the dried lubricant.
A well-sharpened ski is always
sharper underfoot than at the
extremities of the ski.
• Wax remover
• Iron with thermostat
• Wax applicator
• Plastic scraper
• Brush
structure desired) working from tip
to tail.
- A rotating brush removes the struc-
ture of the base for good glide.
Strap the skis together. Position the
straps at the base contact points.
Note: The skis can be stored ready-
waxed (unscraped) for an extended
period of time (e.g. between ski
seasons).
Tools:
- Square - Scotchbrite®
- 20 cm (8 inch) - Sandpaper
file (220-320 grit)
- Whetstone - Central hold-
- Soft stone ing vise
- Scrapers - Swix wax
- Brushes
De-tuning the edge angle at
the extremities
Important: After all finishing op-
erations (by hand or machine) it is
essential to remove any burrs from
edges and to polish the edges to
ensure good ski performance.
This new Prolink adapter can
be mounted on the adjustable
Wintersteiger bridge (ref. 2000:
7217-0111-V01) and is available at
Wintersteiger under the reference
7217-0111- V05.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
 Alpine Ski
Maintenance & Repairs (continued)
Repairing the surface of skis and snowblades
A S
G H
L :
There are two methods for
repairing the ski surface:
1) ‘One colored’ paste + Araldite®
2) ‘Multi colored’ Araldite® + white
+ coloring
Repair process:
1. With a cutter, outline the area
to be repaired, then cut the top
surface. Fig. A
2. Result after cutting the top sur-
face. Fig. S
3. With a cutter, score area to re-
pair (fibers) to improve bonding.
Fig. D
4. To protect top surface, put ad-
hesive tape around the area to
repair. Fig. F
5. Prepare Araldite® resin with gun.
6. Which type of repair to choose:
a) One-color surface repair
b) Multicolored surface repair
7. Add a small quantity of color-
ing paste to the Araldite® resin.
Gently mix (in order to avoid
The TPP top surface
All the adult and Rental models are
protected by the TPP (Transparent
Polyamide Protection). Regarding
the Junior models, they are
protected by TP (Transparent
Protection).
The transparent tops cover the
cosmetics underneath, which
guarantees the durability of the
cosmetics.
SPM 11 EN.indb 45
bubbles) to obtain a homo­ge­
neous mixture. Add a small
quantity of coloring paste (White
DW 0131) to the Araldite® resin.
White paste is used as a primer
in order to have the desired
colors afterwards. Gently mix (in
order to avoid bubbles) to obtain
a homo­ge­neous mixture. Fig. G
8. Apply thicker than top surface of
the ski in the areas to be filled.
Wait a few moments to eliminate
bubbles if necessary. Fig. H
9. Put adhesive tape on the area to
avoid running. Let it dry for 12
hours. Fig. J
10. After 12 hours of drying, remove
the adhesive tape from the mix-
ture. Do not remove the adhe-
sive tape around the area which
protects the top surface from
scratches. Use the flat side of a
cutter to scrape off the excess
mixture. Fig. K
Base repairs
Superficial scratches
Machine tuning will make the
scratch disappear (see the ski main-
tenance repair)
Maintenance & Repair > 45
D F
J K
11
11. Smooth it down with 600 grain
sand paper. Remove the adhe-
sive tape. Fig. L
12. Finish sanding gently in order
to obtain a smooth surface. Be
careful of the ski’s decor/cos-
metics.
Create a decoration
13. For the coloring stage, do not try
creating tone on tone to create
the exact color of the ski. Trying
to reproduce a motif of the ski
design already present else-
where is better and easier. The
final layer of Araldite® tends to
lighten colors. Fig. :
14. Use the Araldite® gun for a
varnish finish which will protect
the ski surface from cuts from
the edges. A small quantity of
Araldite® is sufficient.
15. Apply a fine layer of Araldite®
with a cutter to avoid excessive
thickness. Fig. ● 11
Not very deep scratches or
marks to be filled by machine
- Pour the polyethylene.
- Wait 10 minutes for the material
to harden.
- Remove the excess polyethylene
with a steel spatula for a flat sur-
face.
- Proceed with machine tuning.
12
16. Using a dust-free cloth, wipe off
the excess Araldite® to obtain
a smooth, even surface. Let it
dry for 30 minutes. The repair is
finished. Fig. ●
12
Materials needed:
• Araldite® 2011
• Araldite® gun 50 ml
• Araldite® coloring paste for
smooth color (DW 0131 White,
DW 0133 Red, DW 0137 Black,
DW 0132 Yellow, DW 0134 Green,
DW 0135 Blue)
• White paste for undercoating
for decoration (DW 0131 White)
• Felt pen to color the design,
type 3 points, permanent
(Ref: Pantone 87828 -
color number).
Accessories:
• Cutter
• Adhesive tape
• Towel
• Sand paper, Grain 600
Deep cuts
- Cut out the damaged area with the
base patch die.
- Cut a piece of the base material
with the base patch die.
- Glue it into the damaged area.
- Hold it in place with a clamp and
press repair (glue the pieces with
Loctite® 406 or slow Araldite®).
- Proceed with machine tuning.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
 Alpine Ski
Maintenance & Repairs (continued)
Replacing the tip protector
A S
a “Triangle” tip protector (fig. Aa).
b the right position (Salomon logo
F G
J hammer (fig. H).
a
Replacing edges
A S
F G
Repair process:
1. Verify that the ski can be re-
paired.
2. Remove the binding and clean
the ski.
3. Check the length of the edge to
be replaced. Fig. A
Cut out the base where the
edge must be changed (10 mm
beyond) with the base patch die
or cutter (in this case, make a
reproducible cut-out). Fig. S
4. Cut the 2 sides of edges be-
tween two wings with 45°
angle, as illustrated.
5. Cut out the edge carefully with
cutter or wood chisel, then
roughen the area with 80 grit
sandpaper. Fig. D
6. Cut the new edge, trim it and
remove the grease.
SPM 11 EN.indb 46
D
H 2. Set up the tip protector on the
7. Place the new edge and screw
2 wings near the tip.
Wedge in place in order to
maintain a good profile and
keep the edge horizontal.
Fig. F
8. Apply epoxy to affected area
and heat slightly with heat gun,
concentrating on each wing.
9. Put plastic over cut out area
and insert piece of new base
material.
10. Cover the affected area with
mold release paper and place
ski in heat press. Fig. G
11. When the epoxy has cured,
remove the ski from the heat
press and remove base patch
and plastic film.
Maintenance & Repair > 46
2007/2008 Rental Tip Protector Others rental models use
rental tip protector range 05
“Hexagonal” tip protector ”Triangle” tip protector (fig. Ja).
(fig. Ab). “Hexagonal” tip protector
1. Check that the tip protector is on (fig. Jb).
1. Insert the tip protector on
on top foil side (fig. S). the ski.
2. Place the 2 screws in the 2 holes
face the running base and screw
lateral groove with a rubber ham-
mer (fig. D&F). on (1N.m).
3. Set up the tip protector on the
central groove (fig. G).
4. Finish the mounting on the sec-
ond lateral groove with a rubber
D
12. Reapply epoxy to the affected
area.
13. Carefully insert piece of base
Materials
material into cut-out area. • screw (wood, 1,5 x 15 mm)
14. Cover affected area with mold • epoxy
release paper and place ski in • epoxy colorant or methane glue
heat press. • mold release paper or PE film
• base patch die (KT Technic)
15. When the epoxy has cured, • cutter, ruler
remove the ski from the heat • scale model drilling machine with
press. cutting disc
• narrow screwdriver
16. Grind base and edge locally. • heat gun
17. Plane patch area to obtain • wood chisel
proper geometry with base • repair press 200 mm length
plane or file. • base plane Wintersteiger, file
• belt grinder
18. Repair any damage to top layer • stone grinder
with a mixture of epoxy and
colorant. PARTS (see page 70)
19. Tune and wax the ski. Reference # Item Name
S90190 Standard Salomon edges
for all skis
10/14/10 4:28 PM
 Boot 47

Technical reference

Photo: Christoffer Sjostrom. Skier: Kaj Zackrisson.

for the complete
line of current
Salomon alpine
boots

Standard Boot Norms

Standard Boot Sole Dimensions > ISO 5355
The Alpine boot soles are standardized and bindings are designed accordingly.
The standard norm concerns not only the shape and dimensions as illustrated, but also the friction coeffi-
cient of the area of the sole which is in contact with the anti-friction plate on the binding.

In practical terms: Boot Toe

The boot manufacturers who display
one of the following markings:
DIN, ISO, ÖN, UNI guarantee that they
use standard norms.
In the absence of any of these, check
first with the boot manufacturer. These RB
boots are designed for use with a pair A RA
of classic skis, and not with a mono-
5 min. 1,5
ski, snowboard or skiboard. max.
F
It is the skier’s own responsibility if (s) B 7±1
he chooses to take the additional risks.
E
(bottom view) G 40 min.
When a pair of used boots is brought
in, make sure that any worn parts are (side view)
still within the norm.

Legend (measurements in mm) Boot Heel

Adult boot Junior boot
A 69 ± 2 62 ± 2
B 70 65
C 70 50
D* 100 (L < 300 mm) 80 (L < 240 mm)
120 (L >= 300 mm) 90 (L >= 240 mm)
E 5±1 3±1 RC A
F 19 ± 1 16.5 ± 1.5 RD
G 30 ± 2 25 ± 2
1,5
H 30 ± 1 27.5max.
±2 H 6 min.
F I 4±1 3±1 I
RA 41.5 ± 3.5 35 ± 3 8±1 C
E D
RB 18 ± 1.5 16 ± 2
G RC 4037min.
±4 27 ± 3
RD 36.25 ± 0.75 34.5 ± 1 (bottom view)
*L = boot sole length
(side view)

Boot Modification
Any performance or fit modification of a boot that could effect the function between the boot and binding should be inspected to verify that the
boot meets Standard Alpine Boot Norms. Mechanical Inspection is recommended after any such modification.

SPM 11 EN.indb 47 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Boot Standards & Technical Features > 48

Technical Features
Boot sole lengths
MONDOPOINT SIZES
MODELS 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
22.5 23.5 24.5 25.5 26.5 27.5 28.5 29.5 30.5 31.5 32.5 33.5
X3 LAB 275 285 295 305 315 325
X3 RC CS / X3 10 CS /
X3 CS / GHOST / SHOGUN / 265 274 285 295 305 315 326 336
POISON / X3 JR PRO / X3 JR
MISSION RS / DIVINE RS 268 278 288 298 308 318 328 338 358 358 378 378
MISSION / DIVINE 268 277 288 298 307 317 328 339 350 360
pro Model/Kaïd/Keira/
267 277 287 297 307 317 327 337
KAos/Kreation
IMPACT / IDOL / IMPACT JR 267 277 287 297 307 317 327 337 347 357
CHARM 265 274 286 295 307
FOCUS 267 277 287 297 307 317 327 337 357 357
FOCUS GT 277 277 297 297 317 317 337 337 357 357
X3 60 240 240 247 257 267 277 287 295 307
T3 266 276 285 296 306
T2 / Team 240 240 247 259
T1 208 208 223 223
PERFORMA / IRONY 267 277 287 298 307 319 329 339 349 359 380 380
SYMBIO RENTAL 263 275 284 296 306 317 326 336 345

Last Recap Per Concept

95 mm 98 mm 100 mm 102 mm 104 mm 106 mm 108 mm
Models
Last Last Last Last Last Last Last
X3 LAB •
X3 / Instinct Custom Shell
Impact / Idol Custom Shell
Mission RS / Divine RS •
Mission / Divine •
Charm •
Quest •
Focus • • •

Rental: Intelligent Color Coding

A S Rental : global solution provider.
Available on all Salomon Rental
boots.
Color coding on the boots (Fig. A)
matches the Synchro Center toe
piece markings (Fig. S).

Color Coding Per Concept Size

Color Code Black Green Yellow Orange Red Purple Blue
Boot Sole Lengths (mm) 260-273 274-288 289-304 305-318 319-334 335-348 349-384

Impact/Idol 22/22,5 23/23,5 24/24,5 25/25,5 26/26,5 27/27,5 28/28,5 29/29,5 30/30,5 31/31,5
267 mm 277 mm 287 mm 297 mm 307 mm 317 mm 327 mm 337 mm 347 mm 357 mm

Mission RS Divine RS 22/22,5 23/23,5 24/24,5 25/25,5 26/26,5 27/27,5 28/28,5 29/29,5 30/30,5 31/31,5 32/33,5
278 mm 278 mm 288 mm 298 mm 308 mm 318 mm 328 mm 338 mm 358 mm 358 mm 378 mm

Quest 22/22,5 23/23,5 24/24,5 25/25,5 26/26,5 27/27,5 28/28,5

278 mm 288 mm 298 mm 308 mm 318 mm 328 mm 338 mm

Focus RS/ RS W / Jp 22/22,5 23/23,5 24/24,5 25/25,5 26/26,5 27/27,5 28/28,5 29/29,5 30/30,5 31/31,5
267 mm 277 mm 287 mm 297 mm 307 mm 317 mm 327 mm 337 mm 357 mm 357 mm

Mission/Divine 22/22,5 23/23,5 24/24,5 25/25,5 26/26,5 27/27,5 28/28,5 29/29,5 30/30,5 31/31,5
268 mm 278 mm 288 mm 298 mm 307 mm 317 mm 328 mm 339 mm 350 mm 360 mm

Symbio 22/22,5 23/23,5 24/24,5 25/25,5 26/26,5 27/27,5 28/28,5 29/29,5 30/30,5
263 mm 275 mm 284 mm 296 mm 306 mm 317 mm 326 mm 336 mm 345 mm

Focus GT 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Warning! 1 shell length for 2 sizes 277 mm 277 mm 297 mm 297 mm 317 mm 317 mm 337 mm 337 mm 357 mm 357 mm

SPM 11 EN.indb 48 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Boot
Salomon Foot Measurer
Warning, procedure, and recommendations
Warning
Salomon developed a foot mea­sur­er
that will help you provide better cus-
tomer service by being able to rec-
ommend the size that cor­re­sponds
to the dimensions (length and
width) of the skier’s feet. However,
using the measurer can never re-
place trying on a boot.
The volume fit can be measured in
two dimensions. The morphology of
the foot and physical sensitivity of
each individual, according to his/her
sports activities and level (comfort/­
performance ratio), are also deter-
mining factors in the choice of size.
The Salomon measurer can be used
for all Salomon footwear products
Procedure
1. Have your customer take off
his/her shoes and make sure
that he/she is wearing appropri-
ate ski socks (size and thick-
ness).
2. With your customer stand-
ing up, legs parallel and knees
slightly bent, make sure his/her
heels and medial side of both
feet are touching the sides of
the measurer.
3. Slowly move the length guide
Fig. A until it touches the tip
of one foot.
IMPORTANT: When you are
moving the black transversal
length guide, make sure you
don’t put any pressure on the
toes when measuring the foot.
All you need to do is to barely
touch the end of the longest
toe. Too much pressure on the
toes could lead to errors in
reading by a few millimeters.
4. Read the size written vertically
where the red line is in the win-
dow. Fig. S
For Mondopoint, you have to take
the width into account in the fol-
lowing manner: if the length of
the foot measured is situated in
this zone, this means the foot
measures between 260 mm and
Maintenance recommendations
Use a damp cloth to clean the measurer. It is prohibited to use chemical
agents, hot water, pressurized water, gasoline, alcohol, detergents, sol-
vents or aerosols, which could permanently damage the plastic materials
and erase the marks.
SPM 11 EN.indb 49
Salomon Foot Measurer > 49
(Alpine, X-C, Hiking, In-line skates,
Snowboard) and takes into account
D
the two fundamental dimensions of
both feet.
› The length (main measure­ment) :
it can be read directly on 5 inter-
national size scales (US men’s/
US women’s/ UK / EUR /
Mondopoint).
› The width in direct correlation S
with the length measured. The A
width measurement is partic­ul­arly
useful to refine the mea­sure­ment
in Mondopoint because it orients
the customer towards the .0 sizes
(narrow feet) or .5 sizes (wide
feet).
F
269 mm. Then, to choose between
26.0 and 26.5, you must look at
the width scale Fig. D (in this
case, make it correspond to the
maximum foot width with size 26).
A foot that measures 261 mm
would fit in size 26.5 (wide foot),
whereas a foot that measures 268
mm can fit in size 26.0 (narrow
foot). Fig. F
NOTE: The increases in
Mondopoint sizes represented by
two triangles in a rectangle is made
to remind you that the boot sole The New Salomon SIDAS Measurer
lengths change at the whole sizes,
This measurer allows measures of:
not the half sizes.
• Length: real Mondopoint/french sizes/UK sizes/US sizes
Remember that the size • Floating width in mm with the integration of the cos18 factor to
indicated on the measurer extrapolate the length first head/fifth head.
should be used to help the • Precision: +/- 3 mm
dealer orient the customer
• No care
towards the proper size.
The final choice as to the appropri-
ate size should be left to the cus-
tomer depending on whether he/
she prefers a snug fit or not.
In principle, a technical skier who
appreciates a snug fit will choose
the size indicated on the measurer,
while a ‘recreational’ skier will
prefer a roomier fit and will choose
one size higher.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
 Boot
Advanced Fit Technology Liner
Technical description
Thermoforming
A
Thermoformable zones:
A Straight and anatomical
tongue
- A thermoformable internal side F
J S
that provides precision and
comfort.
- An external side that is more
rigid on the tibia and more sup­
ple in the flex area for excellent
pressure distribution without F Watertight gusset
hindering flex.
G Specific cuts for women and
S Opened ankle area men to avoid pressure points
For ideal morphological adap­ta­ on the lower calf.
tion regardless of the size and H More supple zones allow for
shape of the bones. easy entry/exit of the boot.
Non-thermoformable zones: J Forefoot – The space in front
D Asymmetrical and rigid cuff of the metatarsal is not ther­
Distributes pressure for instan­ mo­formable, which allows the
ta­neous transmission of efforts. toes to move freely.
Layer construction
Middle layer: For foot envelopment
and power transmission
- Thermoformable PE (CustomFit) or
self-molding PU (Autofit)or pre-
formed PE (Thermic Fit)
suppleness
Transmission foam coming from the
Neoprene family for quick reactions.
External layer for contact with the
External layer shell: For pressure distribution and
Middle layer
thermal insulation
Internal layer - Polyethylene, closed cell foam: insu-
lation, warmth, lightness, better fit
Internal layer for foot hold:
- PVC (Thermic + Rental): protection,
For warmth and comfort ruggedness, durability
- Polyurethane (PU), open cell foam - Sensifit cuff construction for envel-
envelopment, breathability, opment of the leg
comfort - Supple exterior for contact with the
High density CustomFit foam for supe- shell and foot envelopment
rior envelopment. - Anatomical tongue
Women’s specific features
Women’s liner with anatomic
A
tongues made of highly moldable
foams for better shin and instep
comfort in sensitive foot zones.
A Sliding band
Helps the heel slide in.
S Specific tongue
S Autofit and CustomFit foams for
D better shin and forefoot comfort.
F D My CustomFit Performance
For a total CustomFit.
F Polar fleece and/or fur
Forefoot warmth.
G Therm-ic™
SPM 11 EN.indb 50
Advanced Fit > 50
Liner Models
New CustomFit generation
G My CustomFit World Cup: My CustomFit Sport: Better cus-
Best performance. Extra low tomization of the tibia and ankles.
D volume Compact Race liner (3 One layer liner: thermoformable
layers). Specific World Cup tongue foam 70 % on original areas.
allowing shock absorbing. My CustomFit Comfort: Better
My CustomFit Race: tibial customization. One layer liner:
H Best performance. Low volume thermoformable foam 60 % on basic
Compact Race liner (3 layers). area (tongue).
Rigid sole.
My CustomFit Performance:
Better comfort on the heel, metas
& sole without altering perfor-
mance. Two layers liner: thermo-
formable foam 80 % on all sensitive
areas (heel + metas + sole).
Old CustomFit generation
Course CF Pro / CustomFit Pro: Autofit: Comfort, warmth,
CustomFit technology + bi-material insulation and personalized foot
technology. 100 % foot hold envelopment. Self-molding foams
and contact with the shell. Due allow the liner to take on the shape
to a specific 3 layer performance of the foot allowing anatomical
construction. adaptation of the foot’s sensitive
areas: the tibia, ankle, forefoot and
3D CustomFit / CustomFit:
anklebones.
Comfort, warmth and ‘customized’
envelopment. Thermoformable ThermicFit: Comfort and warmth
foams allow the liner to take on the - Pre-formed zones protect the tibia
shape of the foot after a heating and the forefoot.
procedure is performed with a - A pleasure to slip into due to its
special machine designed by construction and materials.
Salomon. + Thermoformable insole
(3D CustomFit)
AutoCF: Automoulding foam in the
foot envelopment for exceptional
comfort. CustomFit tongue for a
better tibial customization.
XFit and Biovent
Xfit Active: A comfortable, single Biovent: The very first breathable
layer constructed thermo moldable liner in a ski boot to keep feet
liner with customizable tongue warm all day. This technology
area for shin comfort and a wide helps regulate body temperature
ankle area, positioned at the back thanks to a multilayer construction
of the leg, for heel lock. inspired from apparel.
XFit Advanced: A comfortable,
single layer constructed thermo
moldable liner with customizable
tongue area for shin comfort. The
wide ankle area positioned at the
back of the leg and metas covers
all the critical foot comfort zones.
XFit Comfort: A comfortable,
single layer constructed thermo
moldable liner with a customizable
tongue area for shin and ankle
comfort.
10/14/10 4:28 PM
 Boot Advanced Fit > 51

Advanced fit technology liner > (continued)

Thermoforming machine > Procedure
Before using the machine for the first time, return the guarrantee card to your Customer Service
Representative. Follow the instructions for the thermoforming machine closely and pay particular attention
to the rules on safety.
To guarantee good thermoforming, we have adapted a thermal sensor to our machines. If something is
abnormal during the heating process, the machine will work alternately. If this is the case, contact the cus-
tomer service in your country. Do not take the machine apart.
This machine is for exclusive use with Salomon CUSTOMFIT liners. Any other use is forbidden.

Preparing for use (Fig. A-S)

A S
WARNING
Salomon CustomFit Liners should only be heated for molding
using the Salomon CustomFit Machine. Any other unit may
cause injury by overheating.

1. Remove the machine from its
box and place it on a flat sur-
face. Verify that the voltage
used is the same as indicated
on the machine.
2. Lift the hood.
3. Lift the nozzles using the han-
dles provided.
4. Close the boot’s buckles and
slide the boots onto the noz-
zles. Make sure that the top
edge of the boot touches the
obturator.
Important: Any insoles used
other than the ones received
in the boots at the time of
purchase should be removed
before the heating procedure
begins. Re-install them after
heating to mold the liners.
5. After having read and under-
stood the machine’s instruc-
tions, especially those on
safety, you can now plug the
machine in.

Starting the machine

D F G

Set the timer for 15 mins.
Warning: For optimal results, it is
important that:
- the heating process lasts
15 minutes. Using the machine
for more than 15 mins can dam-
age the liner.
- operate the machine with both
boots in place.
Putting the boot on
1. When thermoforming, you
should only use ski socks that
have the following character-
istics:
- socks that go higher than
the top of the boot,
- socks with at least 45% wool.
Wearing normal, low-cut socks
could cause skin reactions to
the heating process.
2. Remove the boots from the ma-
chine.
3. Close the hood.
4. The machine is now available
for thermoforming another pair
of boots.
5. Open the boot buckles.
6. The boots must be put on im-
mediately following the end of
the 15 min heating cycle.
If you feel any discomfort
whatsoever when stepping-in,
take your boots off immedi-
ately.
7. Close the buckles with medium
pressure, not too tight. Fig. D
8. Close the strap more firmly.
9. Tap the heel on the floor to
make a good impression of the
Achilles’ heel. Fig. F
10. Wait 10 min in a standing posi-
tion.
11. Remove the boots.
Practical advice
› Salomon recommends that no
CustomFit liner be thermoformed
more than three times.
› To optimize the results of the
thermoforming process, it is
recommended that you make
several flex movements during
the 10 minute cooling process
to simulate the anklebone move-
ments when skiing. Fig. G
› It is recommended to wait
1/2 hour before skiing with the
boots, to allow for complete sta-
bilization of the thermoformed
liner.
Drying with a machine
When drying the CustomFit liners
with a drying machine, it is im-
portant to respect the drying time
recommended by the manufacturer
and that the temperature not ex-
ceed 40°C.

SPM 11 EN.indb 51 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Boot Advanced Fit > 52

Custom Shell technology

Custom Shell Thermal Forming
A new patented Kaprolene™ material has been inserted on the shell of the boot near the metatarsal area.
Simply heat the shell, step in and allow the shell to form to the contours of the feet. This personalized fit
gives unprecedented precision for improved on snow performance.

Customization Procedure

A S D F

G H J K

L :

We recommend the use of the Sidas
bootfitting oven Fig. A. Make sure the
customer uses only ski socks which go
higher than the top of the boot.
1. Remove liners from shells.
2. Put the shells in the oven with
buckles open Fig. S.
3. Close the door and start the
machine, set the timer for 10
minutes. Warning: Make sure
to wear insulated gloves when
removing boot shells. Do not allow
customers to touch the boot,
avoiding possible burns.
4. Switch off the oven and remove the
shells.
5. Put liners back in.
6. Help the customer to step in Fig. D.
7. Close the boots with minimum
tightening (first tooth of the buckle)
and make sure the forefoot shell
seals stay in the right position.
Warning: Ask your customer to
stand still. Avoid bending or walking
with warmed shells.
8. Make sure the shell has been
fully deformed before starting
the cooling process. (It takes
approximately 2 min).
9. Cool the boots: in cold water for 6
minutes (level of water: above the
seal) Fig. F. Warning: Water level
should not be higher than forefoot
shell seals to avoid getting liners wet.
- with cold packs for 6 minutes
Fig. G.
- in snow for 6 minutes Fig. H.
- naturally for 20 minutes Fig. J.
10. Take boots off, the Custom Shell
boot is ready.

Recommendations For Experienced Bootfitters

You can use your regular heating tools
though they would be less practical
than the oven:
• heating elements Fig. K.
• gun Fig. L.
• boiling water Fig. :.
Warning: Kaprolene™ has been created
to be deformed by the foot’s natural
pressure. Be very careful if you need
to use a pushing machine on the
Kaprolene™ areas and NEVER push
on the sides areas where Kaprolene™
meets the PU shell.

SPM 11 EN.indb 52 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Boot Advanced Fit > 53

Custom Shell technology > (continued)

Custom Shell FAQ
Can the shell change forms sev-
eral times? As many times as you
want! The wider the foot, the more
the shell will expand. But it won’t
come back…
From what foot width will the
Custom Shell be useful? In size
26, from last 100 or 102 mm, the
customer will feel a real difference.
The Custom Shell is also useful for
thinner feet in order to reposition
the foot even if the change is not
measurable on the shell.
What is the maximum width the
shell can expand to? Up to 6 mm
with the push of the foot only.
What is the advantage compared
to normal bootfitting? Here, it is
the foot which changes the shell,
there is no more risk of misinter-
pretation, the precision is perfect.
Also, this process saves time (30
min. to do everything & the cus-
tomer leaves with his/her boots)
and an easier manipulation (every
KOTF can do it).
Should the custom soles be done
before or after? Mold the soles
before. The customer should then
step in the warmed Custom Shell
with the insoles.
Should other areas of the shell be
changed before or after? A modi-
fication of the metatarsus’s area
can affect the positioning of the
foot. First, the Custom Shell should
be complete. Then, the areas of the
toes, ankles, and navicular bone...
can be changed as usual, though
avoid pushing on the borders of
the Custom Shell insert.
Can I push in the Custom Shell
area with my bootfitting ma-
chine? Yes, but it is not recom-
mended. Since the Custom Shell
material has not been created to
resist to a push that is superior the
feet’s push, avoid the side areas of
the insert.
Does the plastic retract the same
as normal boots when cooled?
Yes, but two times less than nor-
mal plastic: approximately 25%
after the boots have been taken
out (a shell pushed out 4mm could
come back to 3 mm).
What is the benefit of Custom
Shell versus the Custom Fit?
Should you do it before or after?
The work done on the shell must
be done before. This will solve
problems and last over time. The
molding of the liner must be done
after in order to put the finishing
touches on the fit.
How do I know when the plastic
is warm enough? It is the same
process as usual when done with a
manual test.
What is the ideal temperature to
form the Custom Shell? 80°C at
core of the plastic.
How many years of R&D did it
take to develop the Custom Shell
technology? 3 years.
Which is the impact of the new
material on the performance of
the boot? There is no effect be-
cause the material has the same
PU base as a normal boot. The
boot has exactly the same behavior
on snow. On the other hand, once
a boot is fit with the Custom Shell,
precision is increased.
If a customer wants an injected
liner, should it be done before or
after? In general, injection is done
before work on the shell.
I usually put normal boots in the
oven, how is Custom Shell differ-
ent? The normal plastic is going to
change very little and comes back
to the original position more often.
The deformation is thus quite low.
Why is Custom Shell not used in
World Cup? In World Cup races,
one person is dedicated to each
racer; everything is done by hand
and each pair is adapted to each
discipline. Then you could say
having Custom Shell is like having
your own race technician!

Thermolight Quest Pro Pebax Liner Formatting > Procedure

1. Put on the client’s boots at
room temperature. The client
must have the sensation of
tightness in the shell.
2. Identify possible painful areas
(pressure points)
3. Protect those areas by applying
cut foam pads (not included)
directly on the foot, not the
sock.
- Be careful not to take off or
move the pads when putting
the socks back on.
4. Put the Thermolight liner with-
out insoles in the Custom Shell
Oven for 10 minutes at 100°C
max (preferably pre-heated)
5. At the end of 10 minutes, add
insoles (original, custom or
orthopedic) in the liner and put
them into the shell.
- Take care to insert the right
liner in right shell and vice
versa (the liners aren’t
marked but differentiated only
by the shape of the sole!)
Advice: prepare one foot at a
time (preserve the liner not yet
fitted in the oven)
6. Put on the client, taking care
to push the client’s heel all the
way down to the liner to cor-
rectly set the heel on the bot-
tom and thus avoid creating
bends.
7. Tighten the Quick Lace
8. Fasten the shell starting with
the forefoot buckle and making
sure to lock the backbone in the
action position.
9. Provide a clamping adapted to
the morphology of the foot:
- Strong (2nd, 3rd and 4th
tooth) for a wide foot
- Low (1st, 2nd and 3rd tooth)
for a thiner foot
Repeat the same operation for
the second liner
10. Cool down 15 minutes at room
temperature and in a natural
standing position, without ex-
aggerating the bending on the
front.
NOTE: Salomon does not recommend the use of the Custom Fit machine (or any other similar machine) be-
cause it does not allow an acceptable and effective Thermolight liner process.

SPM 11 EN.indb 53 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Boot Boot Technologies > 54

Salomon Boot Technologies

Tool Free Catches Adjustment Canting Adjustment (With Lock)
Upper catches are also adjustable, with or without tools, to adapt +2.5
the volume of the upper cuff to your calves.
+1.5 +3.5
- To move upper catches, turn
them 90°, move them laterally
(+ 15mm), then place them
back to their horizontal posi-
tion.
- To move lower catches,
loosen the screw with a 3mm
Allen wrench, position the
catches in the desired posi-
tion (+/- 20mm) and tighten The Canting is integrated into the
the screw. shell for reliable transmission and
protection. It allows alignment of
the cuff to the skier’s lower leg
shape.
Buckle Teeth Adjustment - The factory preset position for the - To adjust externally to + 3,5°
canting is + 2,5° (a bow legged stance), turn the
Offers a greater range of lower internal adjuster one-half turn.*
- First, loosen the internal and
leg adjustment (+/- 20 mm): - Re-tighten the canting lock.
external Canting Lock with the
- Loosen the screw with a 3
Hexagonal Key n° 5. *Note: Never turn both the internal
mm Hexagonal Key.
- To adjust inwards to + 1,5° and external adjustments as this will
- Re-tighten the screw and
1 2 3 (a knock kneed stance), turn the raise the whole cuff without adjusting
buckle teeth in the new
external adjuster one-half turn.* the canting.
position.

3D Buckle Adjustment
Micro Buckle Adjustment
The 3D buckle adjustment allows the
position of the instep buckle to be
changed for personalised foot hold:
- Unscrew the buckle with a 3 mm
Hexagonal Key.
- Position the buckle over the plastic
lug on the shell.
- Re-tighten in the alternate position.
Fine tune the buckle closure by turning the part that grips the buckle teeth.

Extended Lever Buckles Auto 3D Buckle Adjustment

a b

Extended lever
buckles require
30% less effort
when closing. c d

Walkadin Pads
Walking is easy and safe, skiing
is compatible with alpine DIN Without using any tools, the Auto
standards. 3D buckle adjustment modifies
the position of the instep and/or
lower leg buckle to personalize
foothold:
- Lift the buckle up a
- Hold the lock down b
- Move the buckle to the desired
position c
- Release the lock d

SPM 11 EN.indb 54 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Boot Boot Concepts > GHOST/SPK & Impact > 55

Boot Concepts
Ghost/Pro Model

12 1
A
20 1
A
11 2

3 3
19 13 4
10 10

8
18 5

17 6
16 9

15 14 21 7
Technical description – Ghost & PRO MODEL
L oop to tongue SCS (Salomon PU lower shell and PP My CF PRO liner with PU lower shell  y Custom Fit
M
Shin pillow Cushioning System) cuff faux fur Double dismountable Performance liner
Quicklace Walkable sole Micro alu overshaped Nailed strap canting Custom shell
2 densities heel buckles Insole rubber grip Backbone
Wide strap
cushioning system Extra padded spoiler Absorbing footboard Cuff hytrel by Dupont
Leather finishing

X3 / X3 LAB

D
Technical description – X3 LAB
World Cup Advanced Pu either lower shell World Cup claw strap
Shell technology
World Cup shell
and cuff
Flex 120 or 130
45mm
Back bone
4
Last 95 My Custom Fit World Double dismantable
Racing Kit Cup liner canting

Adjustments and personalization
World cup claw strap
- Increases cuff fastening: a more
powerful fastening for a better en-
velopment than a traditional strap.
- More reliable: it can’t open while
flexing the boot (both before and
during the curve).
5 A
Back bone
- Increases the junction between 6
cuff & shell for flex management
in a forward position: entering the
curve, increasing power on skis.
- Provide support and power to
skiers in a rear position while
getting out of the curve (rebound
effect): the more powerful the re-
bound the more back support you
need to control your skis. 2

SPM 11 EN.indb 55 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Boot Concepts > Falcon/Instinct/Gun/Scarlet > 56

Boot concepts > (continued)

X3 CS / Instinct CS / X3 RC CS / X3 10 CS / X3 JR Pro / X3 JR

2
2
D D
J H
11 L
: K
13
K J
6
4 4
G G

9
1 12 1
Technical description – X3 RC CS Technical description – X3 JR PRO
Racing Kit Lower shell and cuff Custom Sole World Cup advanced Canting adjustment. Micro adjustable
Flex 130 Energyzer Adjustable buckle shell technology 360° 35mm strap buckle
World Cup advanced Canting adjustment. teeth My CF Pro liner 3D buckle.
shell technology Canting Lock. Micro adjustable Sensifit™ liner wings. Adjustable buckle
My CF Race Sensitive World Cup claw buckle Lower shell and cuff teeth
liner. strap. Custom Shell Energyzer
Sensifit™ liner wings. 3D buckle. Backbone

Adjustments and personalization

S D

RACE Kit Rear spoiler (Fig. S) Softening the Boot

Shin plate (Fig. A)
Used to reinforce the forward support and
stiffens the flex. The height and lateral
position are adjustable.
- Choose the forward or internal position
and use a 5,5 mm drill bit to drill the 1st
hole in the cuff where marked (the shin
plate is marked by a cross inside the cuff
of the boot).
- Choose the desired height and attach the
plate using the “T” insert and bolts pro-
vided.
- Align the plate correctly and use as a guide
to drill the 2nd hole and attach as shown.
The rear spoiler (from the performance
kit) increases rear support (with 3 height
settings) and forward lean by + 2°.
- Choose the desired height and attach
using the screw provided, in the pre-
drilled hole.
Delta H lift (Fig. D)
The 4 mm heel lift (from the performance
kit) can be used to improve instep/heel
hold and put the skiers weight forward
for faster initiation. Remove the liner and
position the wedge in the hole provided in
the rear of the Custom Sole.
Even if the flex is more progressive than
with tradtional racing boots, it can be
soften further more:
Reversible Method: Remove the cant-
ing lock screws. This reduces the flex by
5-10 %. Place the plugs from the Racing
kit into the screw holes on the outer cuff.
Non Reversible Method: This involves
cutting the ‘V’ in the top rear of the lower
shell and should be performed by your Additional Features
specialized Salomon dealer. Custom Sole Standard
Buckle Teeth Adjustment
Micro Buckle Adjustment
3D Buckle Adjustment
Canting Adjustment
54 Salomon Boot Technologies
60 Performance Accessories

SPM 11 EN.indb 56 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Boot Boot Concepts > MISSION & DIVINE > 57

Boot concepts > (continued)

Mission RS / Divine RS

Adjustments and personalization 8

1
A S 2
7
D

9
FOR A PERFECT FIT
H
Sensifit™ Fig. A
A soft material over the instep for
improved envelopment and easier
step-in.
Adjustable Women spoiler Fig. S
- To move the spoiler, turn the
screw 180° with a 5mm Allen
wrench. 5 F G
Additional Features
Biovent liner
Tool Free Catches Adjustment
The very first breathable liner in
Two Extended Lever Buckles Technical description – Mission 12
a ski boot to keep feet warm all
Canting Adjustment Loop on tongue Spaceframe shell Micro adjustable
day. This technology helps regu- profile second skin buckles
Micro Buckle Adjustment Wide strap
late body temperature thanks to last and shell My Custom Fit Pro
54 Salomon Boot Technologies Tool free catch
a multilayer construction inspired adjustment Pads liner Biovent
60 Performance Accessories Canting Dismantable flex rivet
from apparel.

Mission / Divine

Adjustments and personalization

9
Romavable Rear Spoiler
You remove it by clipping 8 A
S
D
Additional Features
7 F
Tool Free Catches Adjustment
Two Extended Lever Buckles
Micro Buckle Adjustment
54 Salomon Boot Technologies
60 Performance Accessories

Technical description – Mission 6

Sensifit liner wings Pads Removable spoiler
Strap Wings sole X Fit Fusion
Tool free catch technology Advanced liner
adjustment Micro adjustable
buckle
3D sensifit 5 H G

SPM 11 EN.indb 57 10/14/10 4:28 PM

 Boot Boot Concepts > IMPACT & CHARM > 58

Boot concepts > (continued)

Imapct / Idol
11
Adjustments and personalization > Procedure A

A S S
10
D

F
9
For a perfect fit 8
Sensifit™ (Fig. A)
A soft material over the instep for 7
improved envelopment and easier
step-in.
For a precise transmission
Adjustable Rear Spoiler (Fig. S)
Customisation of the rear support to
suit the shape and size of the skier’s
Additional Features 5 H 12 G
leg and increase the rear support: Walkadin Pads
Buckle Teeth Adjustment Technical description – IMPACT 10 CS
- Loosen the screw with a 5 mm
3D Buckle Adjustment Sensifit liner wings Spaceframe shell Canting lock
Hexagonal Key, profile second skin
Micro Buckle Adjustment Wide strap Micro adjustable
- Choose the height (the higher the last and shell buckle
Canting Adjustment Adjustable buckle
spoiler, the stronger the rear sup- teeth Lower shell and My CF Pro
54 Salomon Boot Technologies cuff energyzer
port), 3D articulated buckle Custom Shell
60 Performance Accessories Canting
- Tighten the screw. Walkadin pads

Charm

Adjustments and personalization > Procedure

6
7
A S
A
5
8 S
D F
4
WALK
SKI

Adjustable rear spoiler Fig. A Ski/Walk adjustment Fig. D

Customize the rear support to suit The easy-to-use SKI/WALK but-
the shape and size of your leg and ton releases the cuff for relaxing
increase the rear support: and easy walking. (Push the button
- Loosen the screw with a 5mm down for the WALK position)
Allen wrench. Step in strap Fig. F
- Choose the height (The higher The Step-in strap offers the possi-
the spoiler the stronger the bility to put the boot on effortlessly,
rear support).
- Tighten the screw.
with only one hand. 3
Oversize Sensifit™ Fig. S Additional Features
The Oversize Sensifit™, designed Walkadin Pads Technical description – Charm 7
with supple material, offers easy Buckle Teeth Adjustment
Wide strap Ski/walk position Thermic prepared
entry/exit and an optimum level Micro Buckle Adjustment
Tool free catch Micro adjustable Auto calf adjustment
of comfort. 54 Salomon Boot Technologies adjustment buckle
60 Performance Accessories Walkadin pads Warmest liner

SPM 11 EN.indb 58 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Boot Boot Concepts > Quest > 59

Boot concepts > (continued)

Quest 12/Quest Pro Pebax

7 2 13
10
9 12

16
8
3 3
4 4 14
15

5 6 1 11 1
Technical description – Quest 12 & Quest PRO PEBAX
Last 100 Ride & Hike body Contagrip extended Forward pressure Touring Pads Waterproof gusset
Cushioning system postioning rubber sole plate Quicklace Pebax lower shell
(tongue and heel pad) Alpine Touring pads My CustomFit Pro Quicklace kit Ultralight Polylight cuff
Magnesium backbone liner + Biovent Racing spoiler Thermoformable liner

A Unique & Patented Ride & Hike Technology

Alpine Back Support Management
A S The magnesium backbone, tech-
nology from the X3 LAB (Fig. A),
provides strong back support,
power transmission and progres-
sive forward flex management
when skiing down (Fig. S).

Alpine Forward Flex Management contributes to back support and

D F The specific inner shell (V cut-out) progressive forward flex.
(Fig. D) guarantees a wide cuff
opening when hiking or walking
(Fig. F). Combined with the inside
part of the magnesium backbone,

New Body Positioning

15.1°
30°

Forward Lean (Fig. G) Cuff Opening (Fig. H)

Quest 12 boots offer 15.1° forward
lean, while Quest Pro Pebax offers
13.5° forward lean. The result is
better balance in powder and track
up snow.
G Quest 12 boots have a 30° cuff H
opening, offering easier hiking due
to a more natural leg positioning
and a wide cuff opening on the
back when walking.

SPM 11 EN.indb 59 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Boot
Boot concepts > (continued)
Quest 12/Quest Pro Pebax (continued)
Mountain Pros
Boot Concepts
A S
Ultralight skin shell (Fig. A)
Second skin shell.
Women specificities
• PP Women cuff
• Women light back calf
• Specific liner: my Customfit
Comfort liner.
Quicklace Replacement Kit
SPM 11 EN.indb 60
Contagrip extended rubber shell
(Fig. S)
Contagrip® extended rubber sole.
Waterproof gusset
to guarantee a perfect waterproof-
ness.
Boot Concepts > Quest > 60
Interchangeable Sole Pads
• Switch from DIN (Alpine) to touring pads
• Easy to remove & fully compatible with all the stan-
dard compliant bindings on the market
• Contagrip® material with deep studs for a perfect
arch grip in all walking conditions
If you change the pads, you have to use bindings
associated with the appropriate standard: ISO 5355
(alpine standard) or ISO 9523 (touring standard).
Ultralight Thermoformable Liner
• 280 g (for a size 26,5 boot)
• Heat moldable for a perfect foothold
D F
Upper Buckle Walk Position
Hook: For a better walk position,
you can catch the upper buckle in
Additional Features
the first position (red one) (Fig. D)
Tool Free Catches Adjustment
Adaptable leash: if needed, you
Rear Spoiler
can add a leash on your boots. A
54 Salomon Boot Technologies
specific buckle has been added on
60 Performance Accessories
the forefoot zone (Fig. F)
10/14/10 4:29 PM
 Boot Boot Concepts > Quest > 61

Boot concepts > (continued)

Quest 12/Quest Pro Pebax (continued)

Procedure > Strap Replacement

A S D F

G H
Strap replacement
1. Remove the rear Perf hold to access rivets (Fig. A)
2. Drill rivets with a Ø 5.2 drill (Fig. S)
3. Assemble new strap + plate with inserts and screws M4 (Fig. D-G)
4. Attach the rear Perf hold (Fig. H)

Procedure > Cover Replacement

A S D F

Remove the cover and toe buckle teeth G H

1. Drill toe buckle teeth rivets with Ø 5.2 drill (Fig. A)
2. Drill cover rivets with Ø 5.2 drill (Fig. S)
Reassemble the new cover + fuel racks
3. Drill the buckle teeth shell + cover Ø 5.4 to put the M4 insert (Fig. D-F)
Attach the cover and the buckle teeth with insert with M4 screw
4. The insert must be flush with buckle teeth mounted on cover (Fig. G)
5. Mount the cover buckle teeth with M4 screws (Fig. H)

Procedure > Backbone Replacement

A S D F

Backbone replacement
G
Mounting kit (Fig. A)
1. Remove the damaged axis by cutting off the reveting part (Fig. S)
2. Place the 2 springs in their cavities (Fig. D)
3. Do not forget to put the steel pin before screw and nut (Fig. F)
4. Mount the new backbone (Fig. G)

SPM 11 EN.indb 61 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Boot Boot Concepts > Symbio > 62

Boot concepts > (continued)

Focus

Technical description – Focus RS

3
PU materials to prevent Soles: build to last and
scratches to avoid folding with Articulated sensift for
textured effect (Salomon step-in
Aluminium buckles for
lasting patented) Kit Auto Custom Shell
technology
6
Liner: mesh tested and Oversize tool free
chosen to ensure long catch Rental plate for
lasting comfort. Biovent: 2 buckle fastening barcode
less time needed to dry My AutoCustomShel
liner on the shelves liner + Biovent A

Adjustments and personalization F

Auto Custom Shell: comfort solution technology
S
• Directly derived from our Custom
Shell technology
• Auto Custom Shell is 100%
comfort oriented, providing
comfort benefits with no process
• Last evolution from 104 to 108
• Insert are derivated from PU,
same durability
5

Symbio™ Rental Model

6
Symbio 440 5
Plastic buckles Adjustable lower leg lever
PU Shell Thermic liner
Replaceable toe and heel pads Bar code integrated to the liner

4
Adjustments and personalization > Procedure
A › Adjusting the lower leg cable
- Place the lower leg cable in the
desired setting of the buckle 1
teeth on the medial side of the
boot. (Fig. A)
Longer or shorter cables are avail­
able from the spare parts catalog
Lower leg adjustment
(page 70) to adapt to all shapes
It is possible to change the lower
and sizes.
leg adjustment according to the
morphology of the skier’s lower Additional Features
leg. 60 Performance Accessories 3 2 3
Repairs > Procedure
Replacing the lower leg buckle b. Put the buckle into place and Replacing the buckle and/or fore- Using a T-nut. Put the threaded
tooth insert install the screw tightly. The foot buckle teeth insert into the rivet hole from the
1. Remove the liner and open the prongs on the threaded insert 1. Remove the liner. inside of the boot. Put the buckle
cuff completely. should be completely imbed- 2. Drill the rivets in the buckle or in place and tighten completely.
2. Drill the rivet inside the shell. ded into the cuff material. the damaged buckle teeth. The prongs on the threaded in-
3. Remove the damaged buckle c. Loosen the screw. 3. Remove the damaged buckle or sert should be completely im-
tooth insert and its rivet. d. Put the washer into place. the buckle teeth and the rivet. bedded in the material.
4. Put a new buckle tooth insert in This will prevent the tip of the Save the washer. To remove the liner
place and proceed as follows : screw from going too far. 4. Put in a new buckle or buckle Turn the clip on the inside of the
Using a T-nut e. Tighten completely. teeth and attach with a rivet or liner 1/4 turn with a screwdriver.
a. Place the threaded insert in Using a Rivet. Use a rivet on the T-nut.
the rivet hole on the inside of outside and a washer inside and Using a rivet. Use a new rivet
the boot. proceed with riveting. and the original washer and pro-
ceed with riveting.

SPM 11 EN.indb 62 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Boot Foot Anatomy & Fit > Notions of Anatomy > 63

Foot Anatomy And Fit

Notions of anatomy
A basic knowledge of anatomy of the foot is essential if you are going to understand and solve your custom-
ers’ problems and needs since each foot is unique.
The bones of the foot Types of legs
A. Posterior tarsus
1. Calcaneus
2. Talus (Astragalus)
3. Trochlear surface
B. Anterior tarsus
4. Navicular bone (Tarsal
Scaphoid)
5. Cuboid bone
6. 3 cuneiform bones
C. Metatarsus
7. 5 metatarsal bones
D. Toes
8. 14 phalanges

Distortion of foot when weighted

Normal knees. Varus knees. Valgus knees.

Some people naturally have varus or The canting adjustment by canting

When the foot is weighted (standing
position), it can change in size:
- lengthwise, it can get 5 mm longer,
- widthwise, it can get 12 mm wider.
When the foot is flexed, we notice:
- the circumference of the ankle in-
creases about 2 mm,
valgus knees. The boot cuff follows the cuff allows the boot to follow
the profile of the leg. Therefore, the the morphology of the leg to keep
boot sole forms an angle with the skis flat
ground (i.e.: the ski is not flat).
The ski boots can be adapted to the
- the axis between the talus (as- shape of the leg by canting the cuff.
tragalus) and calcaneus becomes
off-centered which increases the
surface area at the base of the foot.
Therefore, to be accurate, feet should
be measured when the person is
standing with his/her weight distrib-
uted on both feet and knees slightly
flexed.

Types of feet
A deeper analysis of the customer’s feet (Fig. F) is necessary to observe
F the possible deformations that can become problem areas. Salomon has
parts (page 70) at your disposal that will help you to easily adapt the
boots to these deformations.
High arches: High instep:
The skier needs an arch support You can grind the footboard (Falcon
that can relieve pressure on ‘over- and X Wave) to increase the vol-
loaded’ areas. ume. This sole is realized in grind-
Arch supports can be attached to able PU foam. To increase the
Pronated Normal Supinated the footboards. (Fig. G) volume of the boot or to change the
flat foot foot high-arched foot position of the foot.
Supinated or pronated feet:
This is the deviation of the foot’s Caution, grind on the top surface
G H vertical axis towards the medial or only. Grinding the base will effect
lateral side, which can lead to prob- the interface with the Chassis. A
lems in the areas of the anklebones, depth gauge is marked front and
navicular bone or talus. back for even grinding. (Fig. J)
To adapt to this deviation of the Low instep:
foot, it is possible to place wedges The height and inclination of the
directly on the footboard. footboard can be modified by
J K However, this wedge should only be
adding:
- heel lifts (Fig. K)
used if the lateral articulation under
the ankle bone is mobile. (Fig. H)

SPM 11 EN.indb 63 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Boot Foot Anatomy & Fit > Recommendations > 64

Foot anatomy and fit > Recommendations (continued)

Recommendations & Performance Accessories
The modifications that can be made
on the Salomon boots should be
considered as the ‘final touch’ of
personalization.
Before undertaking this type of
operation, it is important to observe
certain basic rules:
- Always proceed step by step,
starting with temporary measures
before going on to permanent
changes.
- If you decide to proceed with the
permanent modifications as a
last resort, they are entirely your
responsibility.
They require the proper tools and
should be undertaken only for big
problems and by experienced spe-
cialists. For example:
- Stretching the shell.
- Grinding the liner (not recom-
mended for manufactured liners).
- Grinding the shell.
Important: Boots whose lower
shell material is not made of
Polyurethane (PU), should not be
heated (risk of damaging the ma-
terial).

Problems, Causes & Solutions Chart

Problems
FIRST METATARSAL PRESSURE
(medial side of the forefoot)
Causes Solutions
Shell too narrow. Solutions all products:
Prominent first › Stick adhesive foam around the first metatarsal on the medial side
metatarsal. of the liner.
› Stretch the shell locally with a heat gun* and other tools designed
for this purpose (such as SIDAS) (except Symbio and Rear Entry).
X Wave, Ellipse, Performa: Be careful not to overheat the Sensifit or
instep gusset of the boot during the heating operation (there is a risk
of deforming it due to how thin this part is).

FIFTH METATARSAL PRESSURE
(lateral side of the forefoot)
Shell (or liner) too Solutions all products:
narrow. Prominent › Remove the insole (increases volume).
fifth metatarsal. › Stick adhesive foam around the painful area to dissipate the pressure.
› Stretch the shell locally using a heat gun* and other tools designed for
this purpose (such as SIDAS) (except Symbio and Rear Entry).
X Wave, Performa and Verse: Be careful not to overheat the Sensifit
or the instep gusset of the boot during the heating operation (there is
a risk of deforming it due to how thin this part is).

ANKLEBONE PRESSURE Prominent medial and Solutions for Falcon, X Wave, Performa:
Pain/pressure behind one or lateral ankle bones. Special precautions are required when stretching the shell:
both ankle bones. Heel shape. › heat* the inside and outside of the cuff and lower shell simultaneously (so that both will be
at the same temperature despite their different thicknesses and layers),
› place the stretching device on the inside, close the boot during the
stretching operation, and proceed with very small successive de-
grees of stretching to avoid creating a space between the cuff and
the shell.
Falcon and X Wave:
Be careful not to heat the metal parts (there is a risk of damaging the
plastic).
Solutions for Rear-Entry models:
› Remove the insole to increase the volume.
› Stick a C-shaped foam pad in the area around the
ankle bones (on the liner).
› Remove some foam from the liner in the area
around the ankle bones.
› Add shims to blue heel envelopment plate.

* Caution: The boots whose lower shells aren’t made of Polyurethane (PU) must not be stretched with heat (there is a risk of damaging the material).

SPM 11 EN.indb 64 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Boot Foot Anatomy & Fit > Recommendations > 65

Foot anatomy and fit > Recommendations (continued)

Problems, Causes & Solutions Chart
Problems Causes Solutions
HEEL PRESSURE Lack of room in the Solutions all products:
boot. Prominent cal- › Stick a chevron (foam pad in the form of an inverted V) above the
caneus (exostosis). calcaneus to push the foot forward in the shell and reduce the
pressure on the heel.
› It is possible to remove some PU from both sides of the Achilles
tendon on the cuff (grinding) and/or on the lower shell
(Falcon, X Wave, Ellipse and Performa).

HEEL MOVEMENT Very narrow heel. Solutions all products:

Achilles tendon axis › Stick a chevron above the calcaneus on the liner.
very hollow. › Stick an L-shaped piece of foam under each ankle bone (for bet-
ter grip).
Thin ankle.
› Add a shim to the top of the liner (forward position that pushes
the foot backward in the boot and increases pressure on the
heel).
› Use a thicker insole.
› Add a shim under the footboard.
› Add heel lifts.

INSULATION AND NUMBNESS Poor blood circulation Solutions all products:

Cold, numb feet.
CRAMPS
Muscle pain under the
arch, in the calf, pressure
points, irritations.
caused by pressure › Make sure the adjustments are not too tight.
on the blood vessels/ › Remove the insoles from the liners.
nerves. › Add a small arch support and varus wedge (or a shim on the inside of the heel under
Poor foothold the footboard from the performance series).
distribution › Grind the footboard.
(especially with
children).
Pronounced arch, Solutions all products:
high instep or flat › Add or remove the arch support.
foot. › Add an insole or propose a custom insole.
Pronated foot. › Remove all shims under the footboard.
› Modify the angle of the forward lean to distribute the skier’s weight differently.
Thick lower leg.
› Grind the footboard.
› Grinding the Custom Sole:
To increase the volume of the boot or to change the position
of the foot. Caution, grind on the top surface only.
Grinding the base will affect the interface with the
Chassis. A depth gauge is marked front and
back for even grinding.

SHIN BITE Lack of pressure Falcon:

distribution. › Add a shin wedge on the cuff (choose the mounting position ac-
cording to the height of the skier).

SPM 11 EN.indb 65 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Helmet & Pole 66

Technical reference
for the complete line
of current Salomon
helmets and poles

SPM 11 EN.indb 66 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Helmet & Pole
Helmet Technology
Helmet Technical Information
Instructions for use and maintenance
- IMPORTANT: the helmet must always
be fastened on the head (chin strap
buckled under the chin).
- Check the adjustment and the condi-
tion of your helmet before each use.
- Always take care of your helmet,
even when not using it. Store it away
from any heat source and sunlight
(since prolonged expo­sure to the
sun weakens all plas­tic materials,
it is recommended to replace your
helmet at least every 3 years). Let it
dry in a ventilated area.
- For cleaning the outside surface of the
skull cap, use soap and water only.
My Perfect Fit
A
Developed with a specialized sport trauma physician
In order to meet consumer’s
needs in terms of safety, head
hold and comfort Salomon uses
two construction technologies:
Standard technology and In Mold
technology. Both provide per-
formance in terms of resistance,
absorption, deflecting impact and
resisting penetration.
In Mold technology: an external
PC layer molded together with
the EPS cap to provide the best
ratio lightness / resistance to the
helmet.
Injected technology: an external
cap made of ABS combined with
an internal cap made of EPS.
Fit foams: All our models are
benefiting from specific Fit foams
disposed on the anatomical areas
to increase head comfort.
SPM 11 EN.indb 67
Salomon channelled all its experi-
ence for your protection and plea-
sure but don’t lose your head!
Our helmets combine our recognized
professionnalism and pure design to
create protection for the senses.
- Do not use any type of gasoline
products, solvents or any other
chemical substances.
- Do not modify the helmet in any way.
Do not varnish it or add any coloring
products.
- After receiving an impact, the helmet
may be damaged to the point that
it is no longer adequate to protect
the wearer’s head against further
impacts. Even if the damage is not
visible, it is necessary to replace the
helmet.
S CE - EN 1077
OSFA
D
Custom Air System (Fig. A):
new adjustable system for a per-
fect fit.
OSFA (Fig. S) With this adjust-
ment system the helmet is cover-
ing several sizes: one helmet for
sizes 51-55cm and one helmet for
sizes 55-58cm.
Beanie Convertible (Fig. D)
Women Customization
Pimp My Helmet
Our comprehensive winter sport
helmet range meets applicable hel-
met standards and uses the unique
Advanced Fit Technology design for
your comfort and performance.
Be smart and protect your head
in style.
Standards
Examples of the main tests of norms:
Roll off Dynamic fastening
Impact test test device test
Covered areas Visibility
measurement measurement
All Salomon helmets respect the following standards :
(helmets for alpine skiers*) -
TÜV certified.
Sound System
Warning: For use with Salomon
snowsports helmets only.
Headphones used in snowsports
may cause the skier/rider to not
hear other skiers/riders. This can
lead to an accident and possible
injury or death. Always stay in
control. Skiers/Riders downhill
from you always have priority, so
it's your priority to make sure you
avoid them. Headphones will also
restrict your ability to hear what
your edge/edges are doing on the
snow and may distract you. They
Helmet > 67
Helmets don’t offer
absolute protection, so
ride within your limits
and take care. !
ASTM F2040 (helmets for recre-
ational* snow sports).
* Non motorized winter sports
may distract you from focusing on
skiing or riding safely which may
lead to less control.
Care and handling:
The earpad sound system is built
to handle cold, snowy conditions.
However, this system is not wa-
terproof. Do not submerge the
Earpad or cord in water or any
other liquid. Do not attempt to
clean or to disinfect your helmet
with the earpad sound system
installed.
10/14/10 4:29 PM
 Helmet & Pole
Helmet Technology > (continued)
Choosing the right size for your helmet
YOUR SIZE Head perimeter (cm)
Adult women
Divine Origins Custom Air,
Divine Custom Air, Icon Origins Custom Air,
Poison Custom Air, Poison, Venom,
Venom Audio CA Elyse Saugstad
Adult Men
Equipe*, Valdez*, X-Wing Custom Air,
Ranger Custom Air BT, Impact Custom Air,
Ranger Custom Air, Patrol Custom Air, Patrol,
Brigade Audio, Brigade Ghost Custom Air,
Brigade Pro Model, Patrol CA Mike Douglas,
Brigade Audio CA Cody Townsend
* Size NOT available for Equipe, Valdez helmets
ADULT WOMEN OSFA SYSTEM:
Icon Origins, Pearl Origins, Divine Origins
ADULT MEN OSFA SYSTEM:
Ranger, Cruiser
JUNIOR
*Equipe JR, Jib, Kiana, Patrol Junior
OSFA System
Zoom, Zoom Combo
* Size ONLY available for Equipe JR (White Red)
Head Measurer Use & Maintenance
H J
Warning:
Salomon has developed a head
mea­sur­er that will help you to bet-
ter serve your customer by being
able to recommend the helmet size
that corresponds to the circumfer-
ence of his/her head.
This measurer can be used for all
Salomon Alpine and In Line Skate
helmets.
Please remember that the size
given by the measurer (centime-
ters) should be used only as an
indication to help you orient your
customer toward the proper size.
The final selection of the appropri­
ate size should be left to the cus-
tomer.
Using the measurer should never
replace trying on the helmet.
SPM 11 EN.indb 68
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62
xXS (53-54) S (55-56)
XS (54-55)
XS* (54-55)
S (55-56)
xXS/S (53-56)
XS/S (54-56)
XXS (51-55)
S/M (55-58)
JR (51-52) xXs (53-54) s (55-56)
The helmet is a safety product: it
must be chosen in the size that is
suitable to its user and be properly
positioned on his/her head (the
chin strap adjusted in the closed
position) to ensure optimum pro-
tection, comfort and hold.
Recommendations for use:
- Loosen the roller (A) to be able
to place the measurer easily on
the head.
- Position the measurer on the
head according to (Fig. H),
touching the brow (B) and the
occipital bone (C).
Important: Make sure the head-
band (D) does not compress
the ears, which would affect the
measurement.
M (57-58)
L (58-59)
M (57-58) XL (60-61)
L (58-59) XXL (61-62)
M (57-59)
M (57-59) L (60-62)
L/XXL (59-62)
M (57-58)
K L
- Hold the measurer in this posi-
tion and turn the roller (A) (rotate
it clockwise).
- Turn the roller until it disengages
(Fig. J).
- Carefully remove the measurer
from the head, pulling the rear
upward, while maintaining pres-
sure on the nose (Fig. K).
- Read the measurement on the
graduated scale (E) in the win-
dow (Fig. L).
- Choose the helmet according to
the size given by the measurer.
- Try the helmet on. Switch sizes if
there is a problem with the fit.
Salomon has provided for stickers
that can be put on the head mea-
surer for a better understanding of
how to use the roller.
Helmet > 68
Choosing your size (see table):
The helmet is a safety product.
To ensure optimal protection,
comfort and head hold, the helmet
must be chosen in the correct size.
To choose the correct size, it is
nec­es­sary to measure the cranial
perime­ter of the head in cm (from
the fore­head to the most promi-
nent back part of the head).
Helmet adjustment:
The helmet must be properdine
positioned on, and adjusted to the
user’s head to ensure maximum
comfort and protection.
A properly positioned helmet must
not be too far forward or back-
wards on the user’s head ; the chin
strap must always be properly
adjusted and in the closed position.
In case of children’s helmets, an
adult should always check that the
helmet is properly secured.
Maintenance recommendations:
To clean the measurer, you can use
a cloth with soap and water.
It is prohibited to use chemi-
cal products, hot water or pres-
surized water, gasoline, alcohol,
detergents, solvents or aerosols
that could permanently damage
the plastic materials and erase the
markings.
Warning:
Salomon does not cover any dam-
age to the head measurer that is a
result of transportation, storage or
not abiding by the instructions for
use or maintenance.
10/14/10 4:29 PM
 Helmet & Pole Pole > 69

Pole Technonolgy
Pole Technical Information

Choosing a pole size Maintenance Recommendations

- Turn the pole upside down with the tip pointing up, Use a cloth with soap and water to clean the poles. It is prohibited to use
- Hold the pole right under the basket, chemicals, hot water or pressurized water, gasoline, alcohol, detergents,
- Your arm will form a right angle (90°) when you have solvents or aerosols that can permanently damage the plastic materials
the ideal size. and erase the cosmetics.

Mounting the replaceable baskets > Procedure Benefits of main technical features
Salomon has made 3 types of replaceable baskets available to you: - Spaceframe shaft: specific 3D
shapes (wing and AHT) for
1 2 advanced performance: higher
resistance and stiffness.
- Bi-material grip:
› hard part for precision,
› soft part for comfort.
- Racing grip: specifically de-
signed for racers, a closer grip
to the pole for higher precision.
- Ultra light foam grip: the best
grip if you need lightness and
comfort with or without gloves.
- Gripfit: the grip with the best fit
and right shapes for less efforts.
- NPS (No Problem Strap): dual
side strap, easy to use and with
improved comfort.
- Interchangeable baskets: the big
one fits off-pists and powder, the
small one is more adapted for all
other uses.
- Carbide tip: bi-material tip for
higher resistance and durability.

A) Mounting: at the same time,
screw the basket on and push it
towards the handle of the pole.
Fig. A. Removing: at the same
time, unscrew the basket and
pull it toward the tip of the pole.
B) Screw the basket on completely Rental Poles
until you hear four clicks (wear
- Salomon designed specific poles for rental adapted to a professional
gloves as a precaution). Fig. S
and intense use.
- This warranty will not apply for damages resulting of rental use of poles
that was not designed specifically for rental.

Pole Shaft Materials > Technical Features

Aluminium range Aluminium Technology Composite range Carbon Technology
- Salomon know-how in alumini- by Salomon - We do our pole’s shafts the by Salomon
um is proven with bindings, ILS same way that golf companies
and Mavic wheels.
- According to this experience, we
Al HHHH do their own golf shafts.
- We defined three levels of
C HHHH
40% stronger 80% of Carbon
defined three levels of strength: Carbon grade:

Al HHH C HHH
15% stronger 40% of Carbon

Al HH C HH
Competitive strength/price ratio 15% of Carbon

SPM 11 EN.indb 69 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Spare Parts Contents > 70

SPARE PARTS – CONTENTS

Alpine Binding 71

SKIS 76

POLES 76

ALPINE BOOTS 76

NORDIC 79

SNOWBOARD BOARDS 81

SNOWBOARD BINDINGS 81

SNOWBOARD BOOTS 83

FOOTWEAR 84

This catalogue is for product display only. Salomon reserves the right to modify or discontinue any product. Every product not available in all countries. SALOMON reserves
the right to limit or to modify color and/or aesthetic versions of spare parts. These spare parts will nonetheless continue to be distributed in their original functions.
All rights reserved. Any reproductions, partial or in full, are prohibited.

(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)

SPM 11 EN.indb 70 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Spare Parts Alpine Bindings > 71

Alpine Binding
Track
Smartrak Prolink + 914 78829401 $$ 20.00
1X2
Smartrak Prolink & Smartrak Control + Z12 TI • Z10 TI • 710 TI 78829601 $$ 20.00
04-05 S912 TI SC • S810TI SC • S712 SC • S710 TI SC • S710 SC • C609 SC • C608 SC •
1X2 C607 SC • C509 SC • 06 Z12 TI SC • Z12 SC • Z10 TI SC • Z10 SC • 710 SC • 609 SC • 608 78378501 $$ 9.00
SC • 09 711 SC • L9 SC • L7 SC • L10 SC
04-05 S305 SC • 06 305 SC • 07 KRR TZ5 SC • NRR TZ5 SC • 08 NR TZ5 SC • FR TZ5 SC $$ 9.00
1X2 78378701
• 09 T5 SC
Adjustable Toe Base Plate
S900 Eq SC 99 • SC 04+: All products • $$10.00
1X2 001178
IFT Free & fast 04+: All SC products
1X2 HI 09+: All products starting with 09/10 range 10833301 $$7.00

1X2 Z Speed all models: Lever adjustment 12027001 $$6.00

Quadrax Toe Track

S700 • S700 SR • S700 T • S700 TSR • S710 • S708 TSR • S710 SR • S711 SR • S710 Ti $$ 4.75
1X2 78379001
• S711 Pa
Z12 TI • Z10 • Z10 TI • Z10 FIS 20 • 710 • 610 • 609 • 609 SR • 608 • Smartrak Grip + Z12
• Z10 • Z10 TI • 710 TI • 611 • 610 • 609 • 609 TI • WARNING CHANGE THE SCREW FOR: 78829701 $$ 4.75
1X2 Z10 TI AXE + (788314) • 610 CP (000930) • 609 D+ (001101) • 607 (000896) • 607 SR (000896)
Smartrak Prolink & Smartrak Control + Z12 TI • Z12 • Z10 • 711 • 710 • Z12 TI SC • Z12 SC $$ 4.75
78829801
• Z10 TI SC • Z10 SC • 609 SC • 710 SC • 608 SC • ITF: 711
1X2 07 Junior TZ 5 • TZ 5 SR • 08 LZ 7 • 09 T5 • T5 SR • L7 • L7 SR • L9 • L9 SR 54833901 $$ 4.75

1X2 08 LZ 8 • LZ 9 10061901 $$ 4.75

Position Indicator
1X2 ITF Free & Fast SC 04+: All products 78385801 $$ 4.00

Central Plate
1X2 920 LAB • 916 LAB • 914 LAB • 920 ZZ LAB • 916 ZZ LAB • Z920 LAB SS • Z916 LAB SS 78576301 $$ 6.00

1X2 920 LAB • 916 LAB • 914 LAB • 920 ZZ LAB • 916 ZZ LAB • Z920 LAB SS • Z916 LAB SS 78829901 $$ 5.00
Smartrak Prolink/Control + 914 • Z12 • Z10 • 711 78833601 $$ 9.00
Smartrak Prolink/Smartrak Control + Z12 TI • Z10 TI • 710 TI 78833801 $$ 13.00
Smartrak Grip + 914 • Z12 • Z10 • 611 • 610 • 609 78833901 $$ 9.00
1X2 Smartrak Grip + 609 TI • 710 TI • Z10 TI 78834001 $$ 13.00
Smartrak Rental 10056601 $$ 9.00
Lightrak senior HL 10832901 $$ 9.00
Lightrak senior JL 10833001 $$ 9.00

Heel Guide Or Heel Track Housing

1X2 C&S: All products 99- Except: Junior 001173 $$ 5.00

1X2 04-05 S710 SR • C609 SR • C509 SR • 06 609 SR 268-348 mm: 78379501 $$ 6.00

1X2 04-05 C305 SR • 06 305 • 06 TZ5SR 190-246 mm: 78379201 $$ 2.00

1X2 SC Senior: All products 260-382 mm: 12030101 $$13.00

1X2 04-05 C305 CS • 06 305 SC • 07 KRR TZ5 SC • NRR TZ5 SC • 08 NR TZ5 SC • FR TZ5 SC 216-304 mm: 78379301 $$ 2.00

Track
1X2 Z Speed: Brake plate 12027101 $$3.50

1X2 Flat Ti: All products 78389701 $$ 13.00

1X2 Smartrak Ti: All products 24729201 $$ 28.00

Lever
All C&S products • Kaikki C&S • Tuotteet • 99+ Except: Junior • Cosmic • Racing • 900 • $$ 8.00
1X2 78393901
850 • 700 • 725 • 600 • 509 • 400

Parts Count Reference

How to read the tables
04: year 230-308 mm: dimensions (T175): size ##### while quantites last ##### New

(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)

SPM 11 EN.indb 71 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Spare Parts Alpine Bindings > 72

V.I. Window
1X2 C305 • S305 • S 305 SC • C 305 SR (0,75-4,5) 78146601 $$ 5.00

Anti Friction Plate

1X2 914 FIS 20 • 914 78830001 $$ 7.50

1X2 Z12 TI • Z12 • Z12 TI SC • Z12 SC • Z10 TI SC • Z10 • 710 TI • 710 SC • 710 • 710 ITF 78830101 $$ 7.50

611 • 610 • 610 SC • 610 CP • 609 • 609 Ti/D+ • 609 SC • 608 • 608 SC 78830201 $$ 6.00
1X2
607 • 607 SR 78830301 $$ 6.00

1X2 914 LAB 78830401 $$ 6.75

All S914 models (except S914 T Fis 17) • S912 • S910 • S875 • S850 • S812 • 811 • S810
• S900 Eq Poweraxe • S900 Eq AL Poweraxe S900 Eq Axe plus 99 • S900 TI • S900 Eq FIS
1X2 887608 $$ 13.00
• S900 Carbon 99 • S900 Eq AL 99 • S900 Eq SC 99 • S711 Ps • S711 • S711 Pi Sp • S710
Pi Sp SR
1X2 00-05 All C products • Except: C607 • C607 SR 888134 $$ 12.00
Quadrax 600 (except Q600 Equalizer) • Q675 • Q700 Synchro C • Q400 • Q300 • Q300 SR •
Q300 Synchro C • Q300 mini • Q500 • Q600 • Q600 Drive Plus 99 • Q600 Poweraxe • Q500 SR $$ 8.00
1X2 000934
• Q500 Drive Plus 99 • Q400 SR • Q500 Synchro C (Drive +) • Q725 Drive + • Q725 Poweraxe •
Q575 • C509 sr • C509 • C407 SR • C407 • C305 Grom SR • C305 Grom • Mini Grom • C610

1X2 S300 • S300 SC • S305 • S305 SC 05- 001134 $$ 7.00

1X2 Universal AFD (adult & junior boots norms) for: 07 Junior TZ 5 • TZ 5 SR • TZ 5 S 54834001 $$ 8.00
1X2 Junior Performance AFD (Junior boots norms only) for: 07 Junior TZ 5 • TZ 5 SR • TZ 5 SC 89267001
Universal AFD (adult & junior boots norms) for: 08 Junior TZ 5 • LZ 7 • LZ 8 • LZ 9 $$ 4.00
1X2 10056701
09 Junior T 5 • L 7 • L 8 • L 9
1X2 07 STH 12 • 08 STH 14 54834101 $$ 8.00
1X2 07 STH 16 54834201 $$ 10.00
1X2 08 STH 14 Driver 10447501 $$ 6.00

1X2 Z Speed all models 12027301 $$7.00

Toe Housing
Z12 TI • Z10 • Z10 TI • Z10 FIS 20 • Z10 TI AXE + • 710 • 610 CP • 610 • 609 D+ • 609 • 609
SR • 608 • 607 • 607 SR • Smartrak Grip + Z12 • Z10 • Z10 TI • 710 TI • 611 • 610 • 609 • 78856001 $$ 10.00
1X2 609 TI • Smartrak Prolink & Smartrak Control + Z12 TI • Z12 • Z10 • 711 • 710
SC: Z12 TI SC • Z12 SC • Z10 TI SC • Z10 SC • 609 SC • 710 SC • 608 SC • ITF: 711 • STH 12 78856101 $$ 8.00
Z 14 • STH 14 • Z 12 oversize • STH 12 oversize 10833201 $$ 10.00
Brake
1X2 Junior SC: Q300 SC • S300 SC • S305 SC • 305 SC 06 887610 $$ 12.00
Junior SR: Q300 • Q300 SR • S300 • S305 • C305 SR • 305 SR 03-07 • 305 06 887611 $$ 10.00
1X2
Junior mini: Q300 Mini • MiniGrom • 305 mini 06 887609 $$ 10.00
1X2 Junior: TZ 5 • TZ 5 SR 07 54834301 $$ 12.00
1X2 Junior: TZ 5 SC • TZ 5 Juniortrak 07 10055301 $$ 10.00
R75 DG X 100:  78575401   $$ 15.00
S920 LAB • S916 LAB • S914 LAB •
920 ZZ LAB • 916 ZZ LAB • R80 DG X 100:  78575501   $$ 15.00
1X2 914 ZZ LAB • STH 16 • STH 14 Driver R90 DG X 100:  78575701   R100 DG X 100:  78575801 $$ 25.00
• STH 14 • STH 12 Oversize • STH 12 • R115 DG X 100:  78575901   $$ 25.00
Z14 LAB • Z12 LAB • Z Speed (all models)
R130 DG X 100:  78855701 $$ 25.00
B75 DG X 100:  78574501   $$ 15.00
B80 DG X 100:  78574801   $$ 15.00
B85 DG X 100:  78574901 $$ 15.00
B90 DG X 100:  78575001   $$ 25.00
1X2 Other range models
B100 DG X 100:  78575101 $$ 25.00
B115 DG X 100:  78575201   $$ 25.00
B130 DG X 100:  78830601 $$ 25.00
C609 SC on Snowblade B85 G X 100:  78855801 $$ 15.00
DG = Double Grip G = Grip
L
l B 85 G x 100
R 100 DG x 100
l L

(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)

SPM 11 EN.indb 72 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Spare Parts Alpine Bindings > 73

Jigs
56-99 mm: 001156     $$100.00
All Senior products
80-123 mm: 001157 $$100.00
Q300 • Q300mini • S300 • S305 • C305 • Mini Grom 56-99 mm: 78406101 $$80.00
1X1 TZ 5 Juniortrak 56-99 mm: 24729001 $$100.00
56-99 mm: 001003     $$100.00
Synchro Center+Rental: Junior/Senior
80-123 mm: 001040 $$100.00
Z Speed: All models 70-116 mm: 11139301 $$50.00
Tools
1X1 Deflex/Hangl & Poweraxe Race GS: Drill bit Ø 4,6 X L 11,5 mm: 001121 $$40.00
Ø 3,6 X L 8 mm : 000814   $$78.00
Ø 4,1 X L 8 mm: 000813   $$78.00
1X5 Drill bit
Ø 4,1 X L 9,5 mm: 000893   $$78.00
Ø 3,6 X L 9,5 mm: 000892 $$78.00
1X1 Pilot: Torx bit for electric screwdriver Fein 25 mm: 887607 $$16.00
1X1 Posidrive screwdriver 7 mm: 000862 $$14.00
1X1 Adjustement tool 000902 $$20.00
1X2 Pilot & Poweraxe Race GS / Hangl 00: Torx bit 25 mm: 887606 $$16.00

1X100 Repair plugs 000846 $$16.00

1X1 Special binding mounting glue 000811 $$10.00

Ø 4,5 mm: (white) 000819   $$3.50
1X100 Plastic plugs
(black) 000818
1X1 Tube of grease 000905 $$5.00
1X2 Transparent demoboard + straps 001188 $$20.00

Plate Kit
1X2 Cosmic & Z Axe plus 15 mm: 78491501 $$20.00
1X2 Snowblade release 78497501 $$34.00

(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)

SPM 11 EN.indb 73 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Spare Parts Alpine Bindings > 74

Screws (Together column number and reference # = screw positions)

ø ø
Référence
Reference
L L
Voir tableaux pages suivantes pour les modèles correspondants
See charts on following pages for the concerned models }
e.g.: 17/ 000900
mm: Ø x L mm: Ø x L
Longueur • Length

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
000834 10 x 13,5 $$ 13.00
000836 10 x 20,5 $$ 13.00
000899 10 x 16,5 $$ 8.00
000900 10 x 23,2 $$ 14.00
000908 10 x 25,0 $$ 15.00
000957 10 x 27,5 $$ 14.00
001004 10 x 18,3 $$ 15.00
001018 10 x 21,3 $$ 15.00
001085 10 x 36,0 $$ 10.00
001087 10 x 29,0 $$ 10.00
001099 10 x 32,5 $$ 10.00
000829 10 x 13,5 $$ 12.00
000830 10 x 15,0 $$ 8.00
000832 10 x 23,0 $$ 10.00
000894 10 x 11,8 $$ 13.00
000895 8 x 13,0 $$ 10.00
000896 9 x 15,0 $$ 10.00
000897 10 x 18,8 $$ 10.00
000909 9 x 10,0 $$ 13.00
000910 10 x 16,5 $$ 14.00
000911 9 x 18,0 $$ 13.00
000912 9 x 29,0 $$ 15.00
000930 9 x 16,5 $$ 14.00
000958 9 x 12,5 $$ 12.00
000960 9 x 27,0 $$ 15.00
000961 9 x 8,5 $$ 13.00
001057 9 x 19,5 $$ 15.00
001058 9 x 32,5 —
001082 9 x 21,0 $$ 10.00
001083 9 x 25,5 $$ 10.00
001086 10 x 19,5 $$ 10.00
001100 9 x 24,0 $$ 12.00
001101 9 x 23,0 $$ 12.00
001102 10 x 34,0 $$ 10.00
001136 9 x 10,7 $$ 10.00
001138 9 x 34,0 $$ 12.00
78385901 8,8 x 14,35 $$ 8.00
78831301 9 x 17,3 $$ 9.00
78831401 9 x 26 $$ 9.00
78832201 BN8 4 x 10 $$ 8.00
78832801 8,8 x 12,7 $$ 8.00
88813801 10 x 12 $$ 10.00
88813901 10 x 20,5 $$ 13.00
10115201 8,8 x 12,6 $$ 10.00

787169 - 787170
001153 79491501 SMARTRAK CONTROL + 78497501 SMARTRAK JUNIOR
Z12TI . Z10
001101
000912
001102
001057
001083
78831501
78831701
78832001
(All prices in U.S. dollars. 78832501
Prices are subject to change at anytime.)

SPM 11 EN.indb 74 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Spare Parts Alpine Bindings > 75

Toe (prices and screw positions on page 74) col./ref.

C305 Grom • C305 SR • Mini Grom • 305 SR • 305 • 305 mini 06 • Junior T 5 & T 5 SR 07 • L 7 • L 7 SR 08 2/ 000894
S305 Grom 2/ 000958
S810 Ti Pi Edge • S810 Pi Edge • S914 Fis • S912 Ti • S912 Fi • S912 • S910 Team • S810 • S810Ti • S914 Pi FR • S914 Fis 24 • S914 Fis 20 • S910 Fis 24 •
2/ 001057
S910 Fis 20 • S912 Ti Pi FR • S810 Ti Pi FR • S914 Pi Edge • S912 Ti Pi Edge • S912 Fis 20 • S812 Pi Edge • S910 Ti
C610 • C509 • C509 SR • C608 SR • C608 • C608 Fis 20 • C608 Fis 17 • C710 • C609 Ti • C609 SR • C609 • 3/ 000930
S710 • S708 T • S708 T SR • S710 SR • S711 SR • S710 Ti • S710 Pi FR 2/ 000911
S711 • S711 Pi FR 4/ 001082
Plaque Axe + 99+ S914 • S912 • S811 • S810 • S910 T • S810 Ti • S810 CP • S912 Ti • S810 SR 3/ 000912
S710 Axe+ • S708T • S710 CP • S710 Ti CP • S711 CP 1/ 000960
C610 Axe+ • C608 CP • C610 CP • C710 CP • C710 Ti CP 4/ 001083
Plaque Drive+ 500 • 600 • C509 Drive+ • C609 Drive+ 4/ 001101
S305 SC 8/ 000961   6/ 000958
Junior T 5 SC 07 8/ 000961   9/ 000958   3/ 000894
S912 Ti SC • 810 SC • S 810 Ti SC 3/ 000911   5/ 000909
S710 SC • S711 SC • S712 SC • S710 Ti SC 6/ 000930   5/ 000909   6/ 001057
C509 SC • C608 SC • C609 SC 6/ 000930   6/ 000911   5/ 000909
LZ 8 SC 08 • L 7 &• L 9 SC 09 5/ 000909   12/ 000958   9/ 000829
920 LAB • 916 LAB • 914 LAB • 920 ZZ LAB • 916 ZZ LAB • Z920 LAB SS • Z916 LAB SS 16/ 001101   16/ 001082
Pilot S710 Cosmic 4/ 001082
S920 • S916 • S914 Fis 17 • S920 Race • STH 16 07 4/ 000910   4/ 000911
LZ 8 • LZ 9 08 • L 9 & L 10 09 7/ 000829
C607 SR • C607 4/ 78385901
S914 Fis 26,3 • S910 Fis 26,3 3/ 001101
Z12 Ti SC • Z12 SC • Z10 Ti SC • Z10 SC • 710 SC • 609 SC • 608 SC 06 5/ 000909   6/ 000930   6/ 001057
Z12 Ti • Z10 Ti • Z10 Fis 20 • 710 • 610 • 609 • 609 Ti • 609 SR 608 06 •
6/ 000930   6/ 78831301
Smartrak Grip+ 610, 611, 710 Ti, Z10 Ti, Z10, Z12, 609, 609 Ti 06 • Z14 08
Z12 Ti AXE+ • 610 CP 06 2/ 000960   2/ 78831401
609 D+ 06 1/ 001100   1/ 001101
914 Fis 20 • 914 • Smartrak Grip + 914 06 1/ 000930   1/ 78831301
Smartrak Prolink & Smartrak Control + 914, Z12 Ti, Z12, Z10 Ti, Z10, 711, 710 Ti 06 • Z14 08 1/ 78832201
Smartrak Prolink + 914 06 1/ 78832801
Smartrak Prolink & Smartrak Control + Z12 Ti, Z12, Z10 Ti, Z10, 711, 710 Ti 06 • Z14 08 2/ 10115201
STH 12 07 • STH 14 • Z14 LAB 08 6/ 000930   6/ 000911
STH 14 Driver 08 3/ 000911
Brake (prices and screw positions on page 74) col./ref.
Brake 5/ 000829
Heel (prices and screw positions on page 74) col./ref.
Pilot Edge Loc SC: S912 Ti Pi Edge • S810 Ti Pi Edge 17/ 000830   17/ 000829   17/ 000900
Pilot Free Ride Loc SC: S912 Ti Pi FR • S810 Ti Pi FR • S711 Pi FR 17/ 001086   5/ 000957
C305 Grom • C305 SR • Mini Grom • 305 SR • 305 • 305 Mini 06 2/ 000834   2/ 000899
S305 Grom 8/ 001004   11/ 001018
S914 Fis 17 • 914 • Z12 TI • Z10 TI • Z10 • 710 • 610 • 609 • 608 06 • C608 Fis 17 • S710 • S608 • C610 • C509 • C608 • C710 • S710 Ti •
11/ 000894   11/ 001004
C609 Ti • C609 • Z14 & Z12 08 • LZ 8 08 • LZ 9 08 • Z12++ 09 • L 9 & L 10 09
609 SR 06 • S710 SR • S711 SR • S708 T SR • C509 SR • C608 SR • C609 SR 1/ 000894   1/ 000836
S912 Ti • S912 • S810 • S711 • S910 T • S810 TI • S914 Fis 24 • S910 Fis 24 3/ 000897   6/ 000957
C608 Fis 20 • 914 Fis • S914 Pi FR • S912 Ti Pi FR • S810 Ti Pi FR • S914 Pi Edge • 914 FIS 20 • Z10 FIS 20 06 •
11/ 000830   11/ 000900
S810 Ti Pi Edge • S810 Pi Edge • S912 Ti Pi Edge • S812 Pi Edge • S912 Fis 20 • S914 Fis 20 • S910 Fis 20
Plaque Axe + 99+ S850 • S914 • S912 • S811 • S810 • S710 • S711 CP • S912 Ti • Z10 TI AXE+ • 610 CP 06 •
11/ 001101   11/ 001102
S608 T • C610 • S910 T • C608 CP • C610 CP • C710 CP • S710 CP • S810 CP • C710 Ti CP
Plaque Drive + • C509 Drive + • 609 D + 06 11/ 000911   11/ 000908
S305 SC • 305 SC 06 6/ 000957   11/ 001099
S850 SC (Drive+) • C608 SC • C609 SC • S912 Ti SC • S810 SC • S810 S • S712 S • S711 SC • S710 S • C509 SC • S810 Ti SC • All SC 02+ 9/ 001083   9/ 001102
920 LAB • 916 LAB • 914 LAB • 920 ZZ LAB • 916 ZZ LAB • Z920 LAB SS • Z916 LAB SS 16/ 001100   16/ 001138   16/ 000897
S920 • S916 • STH 12 & 16 07 • STH Driver 14 08 • STH 14 08 • Z14 LAB 08 • STH12++ 09 4/ 000897   4/ 000829   4/ 000912
C607 SC 17/ 001100   17/ 001102
C607 SR • 607 SR 06 • L7 SR 08 17/ 000909   17/ 001004
C607 • 607 06 • L7 08 2/ 000899   2/ 000909
S914 Fis 26,3 • S910 Fis 26,3 7/ 888139   7/ 001087
Z12 TI SC • Z12 SC • Z10 TI SC • Z10 SC • 710 SC • 609 SC • 608 SC 06 • LZ8 SC 08 • L 9 & L 10 09 1/ 001085   2/ 001083
Smartrak Prolink & Smartrak Control + 914 • Z12 TI • Z12 • Z10 TI • Z10 • 711 • 710 TI 06 • Z14 08 1/ 78832201
Junior T 5 & T 5 SR 07 11/ 000896   2/ 000899
Junior T 5 Juniortrak 07 11/ 000908   11/ 001101
Junior T 5 SC 07 11/ 001099   11/ 000912

SPM 11 EN.indb 75 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Spare Parts ALPINE Skis > 76

SKIS
Tips
1X2 Verse 8500 00-03 • Verse 590 03 • X-Scream 700 01-02 • Crossmax 700 01-04 • Scleaver 790 03 • Scrambler 400 04 89249201 $$ 10.00
Crossmax 10 Pilot Rental 01-02 • Crossmax 8 Pilot Rental 01-03 • Crossmax 7 Pilot Rental 01-03 • Scleaver 7.9
1X2 Pilot Rental 03 • Verse 10 Pilot Rental 01-03 • Crossmax7 TX Pilot Rental 03 • Verse 8 Pilot Rental 02 • Scream 10 89249301 $$ 10.00
Pilot Rental 01-02
Equipe SC • Equipe GC • Equipe 9GC • Demo 10 3V • Demo 10 2V • Demo9 • Demo8 • •Demo Lady • Crossmax V12
1X2 • Crossmax V10 • Rush n°10 • Rush n°7 • Rush 700 • •Streetracer 10 • Streetrace r8 • Streetracer 7 • Streetracer 6, 78570801 $$ 8.00
600, 800 05-06 • •Rush 6, 600, 800 05-06 • Equipe 10 T 3V 05-06 • Demo Lady 06
Scrambler Hot • Scrambler 9 • Scrambler 8 • Scrambler 7 • Scrambler 6 • Scrambler 5 • Scrambler Custom •
1X2 Scrambler 700 • Scrambler 400 • Siam n°10 • Siam n°7 • XW 5, 6, 8 • 400, 700 06 • XW Fury • Hurricane 06 • 78571001 $$ 10.00
Siam n°5, 400 05-06 • Axess 06
Crossmax 10 Pilot 03-04 • Crossmax 9 Pilot 04 • Crossmax 8 Pilot 04 • Teneighty 02-04 • Scream 10 Hot 03-04 •
1X2 78325101 $$ 10.00
Scream 10 Xtra Hot 03-04
Equipe GC • GC Race • GC Series • SC, SC Race, 3V • Streetracer 8, 10, 800, 80,8 TX, Sport • Demo X 2V, X 3V, XR, XT •
Crossmax V8, V10, V12, V800 • 9000 replica 06 Equipe 3V, GC Series, GC Race, SC Race • Aero GT, X • Demo X3, XR, XT, $$ 6.00
1X2 78799401
GTX • Crossmax V8, V10, V800, W12 • XW Cyclone, Typhoon 07 Equipe GC, GC Series, SC Race, RC • Aero GT R, GT, XSI
• Aeromax Ti, STi • Demo XR, XT • Crossmax V10 • Origins Amethyst, Amethyst 800 08
XW 3, 4,4 Tx, 10 • Siam N3, N4, N8, N10, N 40, Flirt, Origins, Sinsation • XW Blast, Tornado, Sandstorm, Vector, AT,
X Radiant 06 XW 4, 6, 800, X3, X7, Attack, Tx, STX, Vector, Tornado, Fury, Sandstorm, Storm • Jewel Amber, Crystal, $$ 6.00
1X2 78799501
Diadem, Opal, Origins, Pearl, Topaz - Demo lady 07 XW 4, 6, 8, 10, 500, 800, X7, X9, Fire, Cyclone, Hurricane •
Origins Amber, Amber 500, Pearl, Ruby, Diadem, Crystal, Jade, Opal,Topaz • Demo lady 08
Equipe 2V Race 07 • Demo X2, Ti, RT 07 • X Wing 500 07-08 • Aero Ti, S, RT, GTI, Ti Rental, S Rental 07 • $$ 8.00
1X2 24729101
Jewel Amber 500 07 • Instinct Fever 500 07 • Aeromax RT, SR, GTS 08
1X2 XW Fury 08 • XW Tornado, Tornado Ti 08-09 • Origin Diamond 09-10 • Enduro 10 10077101 $$ 15.00
XW Storm 09 • XW 8, 6, 4 09 • 8R, 6R 09 • Origin Opal, Topaz, Crystal, Amber, Diadem, Crystal R 5 09 •
1X2 10832701 $$ 10.00
XW Typhoon, Hurricane, Twister 09
1X2 Czar, Lord, Dumont, Suspect, Threat, Lady, Mai Tai 08-10 • Shogun, Vamp, Geisha 09-10 • Knight 10 10879901 $$ 12.00
1X2 XW Focus 10 12145601 $$10.00
1X2 Select, Vital, Zen, Fresh Touch 10 • Powerline Daytona, 24 Speed, 24 Sport, 24 Sport R, GT Pro, GT Pro R 10 12145701 $$10.00

Edges (25cm)
1X2 For all models S90190 $$ 6.00

Base Material (50cm)

1X1 For all models S90158 $$ 8.00

POLES
Baskets
Carbon Poles: Rental Composite 06-10 • Element 08-10 • Element Vario 10 • Origins 08 $$ 6.00
1X2 10853701
Aluminium poles: Origins 09-10
08-10: Rental Anodized Adult, Artic, Artic Origins, Northpole, Divine Origins
1X2 09-10: Racer, Northpole Origins, F-One, Allium, X-Wing, Fury, Patrol, Brigade 10853901 $$ 6.00
10: X-W, Mai Tai, Topaz
09-10: Rental Anodized JR, Equipe Junior, X-Wing Junior $$ 6.00
1X2 10854001
10: Kitten
1X2 Strap Rental Adult 10854201 $$ 6.00

ALPINE BOOTS
Buckle Tooth Insert
1X2 Xwave & Rush • Falcon & Instinct • Impact & Idol • X3 (collier/cuff) Collier / Cuff: 10809301 $$ 5.00
1X2 Xwave & Rush • Falcon & Instinct • Impact & Idol • X3 Coque / Shell: 10817901 $$ 5.00
1/4 turn buckle: Performa & Irony • Xwave & Rush • Impact 880 & Idol 880 • Mission $$3.00
1X2 Collier / Cuff: 12006901
& Divine• Mission RS & Divine RS
1X2 Performa & Irony • Elios & Charm • Mission & Divine 99493501 $$ 5.00
1X2 Focus • Quest • SPK • Ghost • Shogun • Poison Collier / Cuff: 12007001 $$2.00

(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)

SPM 11 EN.indb 76 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Spare Parts Poles > 77

Buckle (M* = Micro • V* = Vario)

M*
Alu: Ghost • Shogun • Poison • Pro Model • Kaos • Kreation • Kaïd • Keira • SPK S: 10818001 L: 10818101 $$ 20.00
1X2
M* Alu: Course X3 • Falcon • Instinct • Impact • Idol • X Wave • Rush • Mission RS •
S: 10818201 M: 10818301 L: 10818401 $$ 15.00
1X2 Divine RS • Mission • Divine
M* S: 12007101 M: 12007201 $$7.50
Alu: Quest
1X2 L: 12007301 $$8.00
M* $$3.00
Plastic: Mission • Divine • Mission RS • Divine RS • Charm • Performa S: 12007401 M: 12007501 L: 12007601
1X2
V* $$ 7.00
Symbio: 500 • 440 S: 78396901   L: 78397001
1X1
Cable length: 540 mm / 22.0-25.5: 882844 $$ 12.00
V* Symbio Cable length: 560 mm / 26.0-30.0: 882845 $$ 12.00
Cable length: 580 mm / 78862701 $$ 13.00
S: 12007701   $$3.00
1X2 Plastic: T3 • T2 • X3 60 • Team
L: 12007801 $$3.00

1X2 Quest Backbone 12009601 $$4.50

Innerboot
My Custom Fit Race: 23.5: 12001622   24.5: 12001624   25.5: 12001626   $$85.00
1X2
Falcon • Instinct • X3 JR 26.5: 12001629   27.5: 12001631   28.5: 12001633

22.5W: 12001756   23.5W: 12001722   24.5W: 12001724   25.5W: 12001726 $$50.00

1X2 Rental AutoCustom Shell: Focus • SPK 26.5: 12001729  27.5: 12001731  28.5: 12001733   $$50.00
29.5: 12001736  30.5: 12001738  31.5: 12001741
24.5W: 12001824   25.5W: 12001826   26.5W: 12001829 $$50.00
1X2 Rental Thermic Fit Biovent: Quest
27.5: 12001831   28.5: 12001833   29.5: 12001836 $$50.00

22.0W: 78400219   23.5W: 78400222   $$72.00

24.5W: 78400224   25.5W: 78400226  
1X2 Rental Thermic Fit: Performa (M&W) 26.5: 78399929   27.5: 78399931   28.5: 78399933   $$ 72.00
29.5: 78399936  30.5: 78399938  
31.5: 78583741   32.5: 78583743   33.5: 78583745 $$ 78.00

22.0: 489681   23.5: 489683   24.5: 489685  

1X2 Rental Thermic Fit: Symbio 25.5: 489687  26.5: 489689   27.5: 489691   $$ 50.00
28.5: 489693  29.5: 490429 30.5: 489695

Thermic Fit: 22.0: 12001919   23.5: 12001922   24.5: 12001924   $$30.00

1X2
Performa T 3 • T 3 Rental • Kaïd • Keira 25.5: 12001926   26.5: 12001929  

Thermic Fit: 18.0: 12002010   19.0: 12002012   $$25.00

1X2
Performa T 2 • T 2 Rental • Kaïd 20.0: 12002054   21.0: 12002055  

Thermic Fit: 22.0: 78399719   23.5: 78399722   24.5: 78399724   $$62.00

1X2
Impact JR 25.5: 78399726   26.5: 78399729   27.5: 78399731

My Custom Fit Pro: 22.0: 78862919   23.5: 78862922   24.5: 78862924   $$86.00
1X2
Falcon 100 • X3 JR 09 25.5: 78862926   26.5: 78862929   27.5: 78862931

  22.0 W: 55472419   23.5 W: 55472422   24.5 W: 55472424   25.5 W: 55472426   $$90.00

My Custom Fit Performance:
1X2 26.5: 55472429   27.5: 55472431   28.5: 55472433  
Impact Idol $$90.00
29.5: 55472436   30.5: 55472438   31.5: 55472441
  22.0 W: 55472519   23.5 W: 55472522   24.5 W: 55472524   25.5 W: 55472526   $$70.00
Rental Thermic Fit:
1X2 26.5: 55472529   27.5: 55472531   28.5: 55472533  
Impact Idol   $$70.00
29.5: 55472536   30.5: 55472538   31.5: 55472541
  22.0 W: 55472619   23.5 W: 55472622   24.5 W: 55472624   25.5 W: 55472626   $$88.00
XFit Fusion Advanced:
1X2 26.5: 55472629   27.5: 55472631   28.5: 55472633  
Mission Divine $$88.00
29.5: 55472636   30.5: 55472638   31.5: 55472641
22.0 W: 11105519 23.5 W: 11105522 24.5 W: 11105524 25.5 W: 11105526
XFit Fusion Advanced:
1X2 26.5: 11105529 27.5: 11105531 28.5: 11105533
Mission Divine $$60.00
29.5: 11105536 30.5: 11105538 31.5: 11105541
22.0 W: 10078319 23.5 W: 10078322 24.5 W: 10078324 25.5 W: 10078326 $$80.00
Rental Thermic Fit:
1X2 26.5: 10078429 27.5: 10078431 28.5: 10078433 29.5: 10078436
Mission RS & Divine RS $$88.00
30.5: 10078438 31.5: 10078441 32.5: 10078443 33.5: 10078445

(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)

SPM 11 EN.indb 77 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Spare Parts Alpine Boots > 78

Bootfitting

1X1 Heating machine U.S. & Canada: Z15620   $$ 295.00

1X1 Measurer 10877101 $$80.00

Bootfitting
18.0: 10078610   19.0: 10078612   20.0: 10078654   21.0: 10078655  
22.0: 10078619  23.0-23.5: 10078621  24.0-24.5: 10078623  25.0-25.5: 10078625   $$ 5.50
1X2 Rental Insoles
26.0-26.5: 10078628  27.0-27.5: 10078630   28.0-28.5: 10078632  29.0-29.5: 10078635  
30.0-30.5: 10078637   31.0-31.5: 10078639  32.0-32.5: 10078642  33.0-33.5: 10078644  
22.0: 55473119   23.0-23.5: 55473121   24.0-24.5: 55473123   25.0-25.5: 55473125   $$ 15.00
1X2 Therm-ic Insoles
26.0-26.5: 55473128   27.0-27.5: 55473130  
24.0-24.5: 88164023   25.0-25.5: 88164025   26.0-26.5: 88164028   $$ 12.00
1X2 Footbed: Standard (black)
27.0-27.5: 88164030   28.0-28.5: 88164032   29.0-29.5: 88164035  
22.0-23.5: 489965   24.0-25.5: 489966   $$ 12.00
Footbed: Performa Prolink+Sport • Evolution 26.0-27.5: 489967   28.0-29.5: 489968    
1X2
2 • Verse • Ellipse • Performa
30.0-33.5: 78592037 $$ 6.00
Sealing gaskets $$2.50
1X4 22.0-27.5: 12002101   28.0-31.5: 12002201
Mission, Divine
Sealing gaskets 22.0-25.5: 55472301   $$ 8.00
1X4
Impact Idol 26.0-31.5: 55473001 $$ 8.00
22.0-25.5: 10078701   $$ 12.00
1X2 Lower leg strap 35 mm (black/red)
26.0-33.5: 10078801
1X8 Lateral cap Y/C (grey) 78591901 $$ 5.00

Innerboot Adaptation / Bootfitting

1X4 Course Ellipse: Canting rivet 78399001 $$ 8.00

1X4 Course X2: Canting screw 78399101 $$ 14.00

1X4 X-Wave • Impact • Mission RS • Divine RS • Falcon • Instinct: Canting rivets 78399201 $$ 8.00
1X20 Toothed nut M4 & screw 10078901 $$ 10.00
1X10 Screw + insert (teeth + 3D plate) 12002301 $$2.50
1X2 Pre-cut foam sheet (4mm) 10079101 $$ 35.00
Prolink Forward Lean Adjustment Wedge : 22.0-25.5: 882397   $$ 7.00
1X2
(All products Course • Performa Prolink) (black) 26.0-30.0: 882398 $$ 7.00
24.0-25.5: 882399   $$ 7.00
1X2 Prolink innerboot adaptation plate
26.0-30.0: 882400 $$ 7.00

Bootsole + Screws
1X2 Back: Performa • Evolution • Performa T3 • Symbio 440 05 • Elios • Charm 8 mm / 22.0-33.5: 487450 $$ 6.00

Front: Performa • Evolution • Performa T3 • Symbio • Performa 04 • 8 mm / 22.0-25.5: 489617   $$ 8.00

1X2
Verse 04 • Ellipse 04 8 mm / 26.0-33.5: 489618 $$ 8.00
Walkadin Back: Verse • Ellipse & Siam • Performa & Irony • $$8.00
1X2 12 mm / 22.0-33.5: 55473201
Course 60 (22-26.5) • Impact • Idol • Mission • Divine
Walkadin Front: Ellipse & Siam • Performa & Irony • Symbio 440 05 • 12 mm / 22.0-25.5: 53527601   $$ 8.00
1X2 Course 60 (22-26.5) • Impact • Idol • Mission • Divine • Mission RS • Divine RS •
SPK • Elios • Charm 12 mm / 26.0-33.5: 53527701 $$ 8.00

Alpine Pad Front: Quest (grey/black) 12002401 $$4.00

Alpine Pad Back:
1X2 10079001 $$ 15.00
Quest • Mission • Divine • Mission RS • Divine RS (black/grey)
Back: W-Wave (M&W) • Course XR Japon • Course GT • Course T • 1080 • 1080 Japon $$ 5.00
1X2 881642
• Course 100 • 90 • 80 • 70
1X2 Evolution2 490353 $$ 6.00
1X2 Back: Team 3.0 • team 3.5 489763 $$ 5.00
1X2 Back: 12 Mini • 15 Mini 16.0-17.0: 488030 $$ 4.00
1X2 Front: Performa T2 • Performa T4 Small • Course 60 (18-21) 882381 $$ 6.00
1X2 Back: Performa T2 • Performa T4 Small • Course 60 (18-21) 882382 $$ 6.00

(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)

SPM 11 EN.indb 78 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Spare Parts Alpine Boots > 79

NORDIC
Laces
Quickfit $$ 6.00
1X1 95 cm: 86065701
(see page 84: ref 86065701 Footwear)
1X10 Quickfit Holder 10108001 $$ 4.00
(black): 10108101   $$ 10.00
1X2 Zip
(grey): 10108201 $$ 10.00
1X2 Lace 10107201 $$ 7.00

1X2 Strap Velcro 25823701 $$ 6.00

Rivet
1X5 Carbon Pro • Racing Skate 9 • Active 9 Skate • Vitane 9 Skate 10106801 $$ 4.00
1X5 861 • Active 8 Skate CL • Vitane 8 Skate CL • Equipe Combi 10109201 $$ 4.00
1X5 Nail Active 08 Black 12011801 $$2.00

Insoles
9K: 25823652   10K: 25823608   11K: 25823610   12K: 25823612   13K: 25823654   $$ 8.00
1X2 Durafresh 5 mm 1: 25823616   2: 25823617   3: 25823656   4: 25823621   5: 25823623  
6: 25823625   7: 25823627   8: 25823629   9: 25823631   10: 25823633   $$ 8.00
11: 25823635   12: 25823637   13: 25823639   14: 25823641
Screw Chart
1X100 Profil Equipe Junior   Ø 6,3 / 14,5: 78859901 $$ 19.00
Profil Equipe Skate+Classic • Profil Active SC
1X100   Ø 6,3 / 17,7: 890111 $$ 14.00
SNS Propulse RC, SNS Propulse RC 2
1X100 SNS X Adventure Raid   Ø 6,3 / 26: F872020 $$ 14.00
SNS X Adventure Raid
Pilot Equipe Skate • SNS X Adv Access • Profil Auto Men/ Women
Pilot Sport Skate/Classic/ Women
1X100 Plaque SPS Pilot Sport Skate/Classic/Women   Ø 6,3 / 19,5: 890109 $$ 13.00
Pilot Equipe Classic
Profil Equipe Skate - Profil Equipe Classic - Profil Active SC
SNS Propulse RC, SNS Propulse RC 2
Profil Auto JR
Pilot Equipe Classic
1X100 Profil Snow/Monster   Ø 6,3 / 14,5: 890112 $$ 13.00
Pilot Sport Junior - Pilot Junior
Profil Equipe JR
Plaque SPS Pilot Junior Ø 6,3 / 12: 108797 $$10.00
1X50 Profil Auto Junior (Skis < 140)   Ø 5,4 / 10: 000909 $$ 13.00
1X10 Vis Réglage / Adjustment screw • Equipe Classic Pilot 55454101 $$ 3.00

Pull Tab
1X10 Pilot Equipe Skate - Pilot Active Skate (yellow): 10106201 $$ 12.00

Plugs
Pilot Equipe Skate • Profil Equipe Skate+Classic • Pilot Active Skate • Profil Auto (Men/ $$ 4.00
1X10   890094
women/Junior) • Profil Active SC • SNS X adventure Raid+Access
Cap
1X10 Profil Equipe Classic • Profil Equipe skate • Profil Active SC   10102101 $$ 6.00
1X1 Screw cap Pilot équipe Classic   55454201 $$ 3.00
1X1 Screw cap Pilot sport   55454301 $$ 3.00

(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)

SPM 11 EN.indb 79 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Spare Parts SKI NORDIQUE > 80

Flexor
115: (red)  10104201   $$ 5.00
Profil Equipe Skate
125: (red)  10104301 $$ 5.00
1X2 Profil Equipe Classic 85: (yellow)  10102201 $$ 5.00
Profil Active SC 105: (grey)  10105101 $$ 5.00
Profil Auto Men 105: (black)  10104801 $$ 5.00
1X2 Profil Auto Women 95: (grey)  10104901 $$ 5.00
Profil Auto Junior Junior: (yellow)  10105001 $$ 5.00

1X2 SNS X Adventure Raid 185: (grey)  10104401 $$ 5.00

Ridge Plate
1X2 Ridge Plate Pilot Skate   78846901 $$ 10.00
1X2 Profil Equipe   78847201 $$ 10.00
1X2 Ridge plate Profil Auto Universal   78847101 $$ 10.00
1X1 S/E Plate Pilot Equipe Classic 55454001 $$ 18.00
1X1 SPS Plate 25823501 $$ 5.00

Steel Link
1X2 Steel link: Pilot   78847301 $$ 8.00

Service Products
1X1 Jig • Pilot • Profil • BC • X Adventure 891000 $$ 65.00
1X4 Reversible jig pads • Pilot • Profil • BC • X Adventure   10106401 $$ 15.00
1X5 Drill bit - Profil Automatique Junior Ø 3,6 x L 8 mm: 000814 $$ 78.00
1X1 Drill bit Ø 3,6 x L 15 mm: 10105201 $$ 30.00
1X1 Special repair plug drill bit 10105301 $$ 32.00
1X100 Repair plugs 000846 $$ 16.00
1X1 6 face posidrive bit 78504801 $$ 16.00
Sticker Pilot Equipe 55453901 $$ 5.00

(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)

SPM 11 EN.indb 80 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Spare Parts Nordic > 81

SNOWBOARD BOARDS
Snowboard Tip Protector
1X1 Rental boards (black) 55473801 $$ 8.00

SNOWBOARD BINDINGS
No spare parts for S PRO TEAM bindings

Transmission Pads
1X2 $$ 8.00
L+R Base Pad all SP models (khaki/black) S: 55473954   M/L: 55473955

1X2 S: 78858454   M: 78858456   L: 78858458 $$ 30.00

L+R Base Pad all SPX models (black)
1X2 S: 78836255   L: 78836258 $$ 10.00
L+R Base Pad all Force & Grace models (black)
1X2 $$4,00
L+R Base Front Pad Slasher: all Slasher models, Arcade, Stella, Celeste, Patriot S: 10832254   M/L: 10832257
1X2 Black: S: 53527254   M: 53527256   L: 53527258 $$ 18.00
L+R Base Pad all Relay models (black)
1X2 Cover disc Pad + Screw for transfer base: Black: S: 10832554   M: 10832556   L: 10832558   $$4,00
L+R Transfer models White: S: 10834254   M: 10834256   L: 10834258   $$4,00

4x4 Disks
1X8 Screw + washers for disk - All Models (except 98 Rental) 88999301 $$ 5.00
1X2 6 holes Disk IMS + Screws + Washers - All Models (except 98 Rental & Speedfit) 78855401 $$ 8.00

Straps
S: (black) 12023654   M: (black) 12023656   L: (black) 12023658 $$10.00
1X2 Toe Strap - All Models + M4 Toolfree
S: (white) 12023754   M: (white) 12023756   L: (white) 12023758 $$10.00
1X2 Toe Adjuster - All S and SP Models (black) S: 53527454   M/L: 53527457 $$ 3.50
S: (black) 78563554   M/L: (black) 78563557 $$ 4.00
1X2 Toe Adjuster - All SPX, Force, Grace & Relay Models (black)
S: (white) 10134054   M/L: (white) 10134057 $$ 2.50
1X2 Holding toe strap adjuster - All Relay and Slasher models (black) 78839301 $$ 3.00

1X2 Holding toe strap adjuster - All Force and Grace models (white) 53527501 $$ 5.00
1X2 Toe Sawblade - All SP Models 06- (black) S/M: 78374919   L: 78374921 $$ 5.00
1X2 Toe Sawblade - All SP Models 06+ (black) S/M: 78837054   L: 78837057 $$ 7.00
S/M: (black) 12023855   L: (black) 12023858 $$2.00
1X2 Narrow Toe Sawblade 19 mm + Holding fast fit pin: All models with narrow buckle 10+
S/M: (white) 12024055   L: (white) 12024058 $$2.00
S/M: (black) 78837155   L: (black) 78837158 $$ 12.00
1X2 Toe Sawblade 24 mm + Holding fast fit: All Models 09- except SP models. (black)
S/M: (white) 10134155   L: (white) 10134158 $$ 2.50
1X2 Alu TOE Buckle All Models 09- 78855301 $$ 25.00

1X2 Alu ANKLE Buckle All Models 09- 78836901 $$ 28.00

TOE ratchet viper for sawblade 19 mm $$7.00
1X2 12024101
width All Models 10+
1X2 ANKLE buckle viper & screw All Models 10+ 12024301 $$7.00

1X2 145 mm / S/M: 99494055   $$ 25.00

Ankle Strap All Relay Models (black)
L+R 165 mm / L: 78560054 $$ 33.00
1X2 145 mm / S/M: 99494155   $$ 25.00
Ankle Strap All Relay Models (white)
L+R 165 mm / L: 78838755 $$ 40.00
1X2 165 mm / S: 78560054   $$ 33.00
Ankle Strap All models (SP, SPX, Grace). (black)
L+R 185 mm / M/L: 78560057 $$ 33.00
1X2 165 mm / S: 78838755   $$ 40.00
Ankle Strap All models (SP, SPX, Grace). (white)
L+R 185 mm / M/L: 78838758 $$ 40.00
(black) 165 mm / S: 12024455   $$10.00
1X2 Cored Out Ankle Strap (black) 185 mm / M/L: 12024458 $$10.00
L+R All models except Relay. (white) 165 mm / S: 12024555   $$10.00
(white) 185 mm / M/L: 12024558 $$10.00
(black) 78839201 $$ 4.00
1X2 Ankle Sawblade + Ring + Toothed Nut M5 All Models
(white) 10131401 $$ 2.50

(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)

SPM 11 EN.indb 81 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Spare Parts Snowboard Bindings > 82

(black) 12024601 $$2.50

1X2 Ankle Adjustment Kit Ring + Toolfree Adjuster M4 + Tooth Nut All models
(white) 12024701 $$2.50
1X2 Aesthetic Strap Washer + Strap Screw M5: Relay screw outside (white) 78839101 $$ 3.00

1X2 Aesthetic Strap Nut + Strap Screw M5: Relay screw inside 99493801 $$ 4.00
Strap Kit (screw M5/nut M5/wascher M5) - (Toe/Ankle) All SP models 889905 $$ 5.00
1X4
Strap Kit (screw M5/nut M5/wascher M5) - (Ankle) All SPX models 88999701 $$ 6.00
1X4 Strap Kit (screw + nut) - (Ankle) All Force & Grace models . 78836801 $$ 6.00

Spoilers • Highback
1X2 Highback Rotation Screw: All Relay models 78839401 $$ 3.00
1X2 Toolfree FWL Adjuster: All models (grey) 78837501 $$ 7.00
1X1 Highback + FWL Adjuster + Screw: All W models except Relay (white) S/M: 78839755 $$ 16.50
1X1 Highback + FWL Adjuster + Screw: All models except Relay S/M: 78839855   L: 78839858 $$ 13.00
1X2 FWL Adjuster: Only Force model (grey) 99493901 $$ 5.00
1X2 FWL Adjuster: All models 06- except Force & Relay (black) 78857701 $$ 6.00

1X2 Length Base Adjustment Kit: All Force & Grace models (black) 78858001 $$ 6.00

Rental • Speedfit / Fastec

1X2 Disk: Speedfit & Fastec models 78333801 Aftermarket $$ 30.00
1X8 Screw 4X4 M6X20: Speedfit & Fastec models 78620501 $$ 4.00

Rental • Speedfit
1X2 Ankle Strap 78697201 $$ 22.00
1X2 Aluminum Buckle + Screw M5 + Save nut M5 X 8 12025801 $$10.00
1X2 Plastic Buckle + Screw M5 + Save nut M5 X 8 78619001 $$ 8.00
1X2 Quick cricket: Tool free ankle strap adjustment 78619101 $$ 8.00
1X2 TOE: Sawblade Fast Fit Tooth Straps 9,5 mm hole: 78619201 $$ 4.00
1X2 ANKLE: Sawblade straps for bolt gard 05+ 9,5 mm hole: 78619301 $$ 4.00
1X2 Holding Fast Fit: Toestrap snap support easy base 78619401 $$ 4.00
1X2 Toestrap L/XL . (S/M couper 1 trou pour petite taille) 78619559 $$ 15.00
1X2 Heelcup lever 78620601 $$ 4.00
1X4 Highback screw + bush + nut M6 . 78620701 $$ 4.00
1X2 Forward lean screw + washer + savenut M5 X 10 78620901 $$ 4.00
1X1 Highback + FWL adjuster + screw 10- S/M: 78621101 $$ 16.00
1X1 Highback Cored Out + FWL adjuster + screw 10+ L/XL, S/M: 12026601 $$7.00
1X2 Forward lean adjuster HB + screw & nut M5 x 10 10- S/M: 78621301 $$ 6.00
1X2 Forward lean adjuster HB + screw & nut M5 x 10 10- L/XL: 78621401 $$ 6.00
1X2 Forward lean adjuster HB + screw & nut M5 x 10 10- L/XL, S/M: 12026901 $$2.00
1X2
Scratchs + Springs + Covers + Levers + Screws 78840001 $$ 20.00
L&R
1X6 Plug for base plate 12027401 $$7.00
1X2 $$4,00
Front Pad + Screws S/M: 10834655   M/L: 10834658  
L+R
Rental • Fastec
1X2 $$15,00
Kit Ankle strap Fastec 10835401
L+R
1X2 Kit Toe strap Fastec 10835501 $$15,00
1X2 $$4,00
Toe strap adjuster 10835601
L+R
1X2 $$4,00
Ankle strap adjuster ( special nut, screw M5x8, safety washer,connection nut) 10835701
L+R
1X2 $$10,00
ARS Autorelease buckles KIT ( M5x8 screw ,Buckle cam, Nut M5, safety washer) 10835801
L+R
1X2 $$20,00
Scratchs + Springs + Covers + Levers + Screws S/M M/L: 10835955   L/XL: 10835957  
L+R

(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)

SPM 11 EN.indb 82 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Spare Parts Snowboard Bindings > 83

SNOWBOARD BOOTS
Liners
23.0‑23.5: 78835921   24.0‑24.5: 78835923   25.0‑25.5: 78835925  
FULL CUSTOM FIT Pro -
1X2 26.0‑26.5: 78835928   27.0‑27.5: 78835930   28.0‑28.5: 78835932   $$ 122.00
All Models Except Talapus & F models
29.0‑29.5: 78835935   30.0‑30.5: 78835937
23.0‑23.5: 78836021   24.0‑24.5: 78836023   25.0‑25.5: 78836025  
CUSTOM FIT -
1X2 26.0‑26.5: 78836028   27.0‑27.5: 78836030   28.0‑28.5: 78836032   $$ 74.00
All Models Except Talapus & F models
29.0‑29.5: 78836035   30.0‑30.5: 78836037
Inner Soles
23.0: 78611721   23.5: 78611722   24.0: 78611723   24.5: 78611724  
25.0: 78611725   25.5: 78611726   26.0: 78611728   26.5: 78611729   $$ 11.00
1X2 All models except Talapus
27.0: 78611730   27.5: 78611731   28.0: 78611732   28.5: 78611733  
29.0: 78611735   29.5: 78611736   30.0: 78611737   30.5: 78611738
Laces
1X2 Power Lace handle (All models) with Power Lace 78396101 $$ 8.00
1X2 Lace Pulley (All models) with SPL lace 10836201 $$3,00
1X2 Combo closed + lace: for SPL models only 10836101 $$2,00

1X2 Minicombo Main Part 09- All models except Kamooks and Talapus 99494501 $$ 7.00

1X2 Minicombo Main Part 10+ All models except Kamooks and Talapus 12038601 $$2.00

1X2 Power Lace Locker (All models) 78396201 $$ 5.00

1X2 LINER Kevlar Lace Locker (All models) 78396301 $$ 5.00
1X4 Open Top Hook Block / Crochet • All authentic models 08- Lace hook or Top Block 78396501 $$ 5.00

1X4 Closed Bottom Hook Block / Crochet • All authentic models 08- Eyestack Block 78396601 $$ 5.00

1X2 Open Eyestay block (Fusion models only) 19578501 $$ 4.00

1X2 Closed Eyestay block (Fusion models only) 19578601 $$ 4.00

1X8 Open Top Hook Block: All Authentic models 09+ 10837301 $$4,00
1X4 Closed Eyestay / Bottom Hook Block: All Authentic models 09+ 10837101 $$4,00
1X2 Metal hook 10837401 $$2,00
(black) 25.5: 78396026 28.5: 78396733 31.5: 78396841   $$2.00
(black) 225 cm / 31.5: 12038941   $$2.00
1X2 Lace (all Power Lace models) (white) 225 cm / 31.5: 12039041 $$2.00
(dark brown) 225 cm / 31.5: 12039141   $$2.00
(red) 225 cm / 31.5: 12039241   $$2.00
1X1 (All models) Liner kevlar lace (black) 25 m  78396401 $$ 17.00

1X2 Big Speed Lace Locker + Lace 78836101 $$ 10.00

1X2 Speed Lace Locker + Lace 88935501 $$ 2.50

1X2 New combo («tongue lace locker with springs») 99494701 $$ 4.00

1X2 BOA coiler reel • O6 (B521) All BOA models 06- 19578701 $$ 40.00
1X2 BOA coiler reel • H2 (B779B) All BOA models 10+ 12038701 $$18.00
1X2 BOA Lace cable • All BOA models 130 cm / 22.0‑26.5: 19578801   $$ 14.00
1X2 BOA Lace cable • All BOA models 10+ 140 cm / 27.0‑31.5: 12039301 $$4.00

(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)

SPM 11 EN.indb 83 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Spare Parts Footwear > 84

FOOTWEAR
Laces
1,60 m: 86065401   1,80 m: 86065501   $$ 6.00
1X2 Mountain Lace (grey)
2,00 m: 86065601   $$ 6.00
Junior lace (black) 1,00 m: 86065101   $$ 6.00
1X2
Footwear lace (black) 1,30 m: 86065201   (grey) 1,30 m: 86065301 $$ 6.00
(black): 86065701   $$ 6.00
1X2 Quick Lace Kit
(grey): 86065801 $$ 8.00
(black): 12012301   $$4.50
1X2 Quick Lace Small Kit
(grey): 12012401 $$4.50

Poulies • Lace Hooks & Loops

1X10 Plastic (black) 86067301 $$ 6.00

1X10 Lace Hook 86067401 $$ 8.00

Inner Soles
1X2 EVA insoles decut & perforated
1X2 Molded Felt Sockliner
3,5/4: 86065921   4,5/5: 86065923   5,5/6: 86065925   6,5/7: 86065927  
7,5/8: 86065929   8,5/9: 86065931   9,5/10: 86065933   10,5/11: 86065935   $$ 10.00
11,5/12: 86065937   12,5/13: 86065939
3,5: 86068220   4,0: 86068221   4,5: 86068222   5,0: 86068223   5,5: 86068224  
6,0: 86068225   6,5: 86068226   7,0: 86068227   7,5: 86068228   8,0: 86068229  
8,5: 86068230   9,0: 86068231   9,5: 86068232   10,0: 86068233   10,5: 86068234   $$ 14.00
11,0: 86068235   11,5: 86068236   12,0: 86068237   12,5: 86068238  
13,0: 86068239

(All prices in U.S. dollars. Prices are subject to change at anytime.)

SPM 11 EN.indb 84 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Warranty Warranty > 85

Salomon Retail Binding Limited Warranty

Salomon Retail Alpine Bindings are covered under warranty against defects in materials and manufacturing for a period of five years from their date of purchase to the
original customer. In the absence of proof-of-purchase, this warranty period will be five years from date of manufacture of the product as indicated by production code. This
warranty only covers the defective component, not the full pair or set, i.e., left toe piece, brake, right heel, etc. Abuse and normal wear are not covered by this warranty.

Replacement Procedures Mechanical Inspection Failures

Step One. Verify by customer receipt or production code that the defective
component is under warranty. (Warranty claims should be handled through
Authorized Dealers to ensure speed and accuracy of product replacement.
Please do not refer a customer directly to Salomon.)
Step Two: Call customer service for return authorization number.
(There is no longer an express warranty form.)
Step Three: Return the defective set to Salomon with the return authorization
number clearly printed on the outside of the package. Return the entire set,
unless otherwise instructed by customer service.
Ship the package freight pre-paid to:
USA Canada
Salomon Service Center Salomon Canada Sports
Building 5X, Bay 6 Division of Amer Sports Canada Inc.
710 West Amidan Drive 3545 Thimens Blvd.
Ogden, UT 84404 Saint-Laurent, Quebec H4R 1V5
Upon a dealer’s request to Customer Service, a warranty replace­ment compo-
nent can be shipped in advance to the dealer before it is inspected at Salomon’s
Service Center. Salomon will invoice the dealer for the replacement component
and issue a credit when the defective component is received and verified. If the
defective compo­nent exchanged for the advance replacement is not received
within 45 days from the issue of the Return Authorization Number, or proves
not to be defective, no credit will be issued for the replacement product.
Step Four: Salomon will ship the replacement product to the dealer, surface
freight pre-paid, after verification of the defect.
Salomon Service Center
In the event an unusual situation is encountered or a technical question arises
please call the Salomon Service Center at:
USA 1-800-654-2668
CAN 1-800-361-3398 ext. 1142
Normal wear is expected with the use of a product. Should a component fail a
mechanical inspection (measured release values that fall outside the “In-Use
Range”) within its warranty period, include the following information with the
returned component.
• Description of inspection that the component failed.
• Brand of test device and date of most recent calibration.
• Skier Code and visual indicator setting.
• Boot brand, model and sole length.
• All measured release values and name of the technician.
Every Salomon binding component is precision tested to assure its accuracy
during manufacture. It is extremely rare that a component would be out of
calibration unless there is visible damage. All bindings returned due to me-
chanical testing failures are inspected. No replacement product will be issued
unless all required information is included with the product.
Product Age Verification
Verification that the product is within the warranty period can be made in
the following two ways:
1. Customer receipt indicating product was purchased within the last five years.
2. Component production code* indicating manufacture of product within last five
years.
Note
* All Salomon binding components are stamped with a two- or three-digit code upon their
final production to indicate month and year of production. Normally, codes are a letter
followed by a number, with the letter indicating month of produc­tion. Each number cor-
responds to the actual year of production, i.e., 3 would indicate 2003, 4 would indicate
2004, etc. To simplify the warranty process, product age is determined by the year of
production only. Retail bindings with a production code indicating that the bindings were
manufac­tured in 2006 (e.g., A6, M6) will be warranted until the end of the 2010/2011 ski
season. Production codes are stamped in various places on all binding components.

Salomon Alpine Skis, Snowblade & Boot Warranty

Salomon alpine skis, Snowblade and
boots are warranted for a period of
2 years from date of original purchase.
To determine the period covered by the
warranty, the customer has to show the
sales receipt.
The Salomon Snowblade warranty can
only function if the customer presents
the Snowblade unit to the dealer as it
was sold (ski and binding). If not, the
warranty cannot be honored.
Salomon Pilot set warranty
The skis are covered for 2 years from
the date of original purchase.
The bindings are covered by a 5 years
warranty from the date of original
purchase.
Ski: if there is a problem that is
covered by the warranty (breakage,
pulled edge…) that occurs during the
warranty period (2 years), Salomon will
replace either the Ski + Binding unit
or the Ski Only at our discretion.
Binding: if there is a problem that
is covered by the Salomon warranty
(breakage, binding pulled-out…) that
occurs during the warranty period
(5 years), Salomon will replace the
Binding Only, except if the damage con-
cerns the brake or the AFD plate. In this
case, Salomon will replace the defec-
tive part(s) with spare parts.
Salomon’s only liability as regards this
warranty will be to repair or replace the
defective product with a model or pair ent to follow the instructions for use,
within the limits of available stock. modification of the product or normal
These warranties cover skis, Snowblade, wear and tear.
bindings against manufacturing defects. In case of damage to a product caused
by an accident or misuse, please consult
However, these warranties do not
Salomon Customer Service for advice
cover damage resulting from transport,
handling, storage, failure by the cli- on possible repair or replacement.
Ski problems not covered by the warranty
Problems Solutions
Bent skis Contact subsidiary for more information
Top surface Can be repaired
Tip protector Can be repaired with spare parts
Tail protector Cannot be repaired
Running surface Can be repaired
Binding pull-out Can be repaired with inserts
Pulled edge Can be repaired
For all other problems, contact the subsidiary Customer Service.

Salomon Helmet & Alpine Pole Warranty

Salomon helmets and poles are guar-
anteed against defects in materials and
manufacturing for a period of one year
from their date of purchase*.
This warranty only covers the defective
compo­nents. Claims arising from im-
proper storage of product, modification,
abuse and normal wear are not covered
by this warranty. This warranty applies
only to products sold by an Authorized
Salomon Dealer. For warranty service,
present the defective helmet with the
original sales receipt to your nearest
Authorized Salomon Dealer.
* This warranty may vary in some
countries.
Salomon’s only liability regarding this
warranty will be to repair or replace the
defective product with a model in an
available version.
Warning:
The Salomon helmets are designed only
for the following activities: ski, snow-
board and skiboard (Snowblade®).
They are not designed to be used on
motorbikes or for other sports, me-
chanical or not.
The Alpine Salomon poles are designed
for cross­country or downhill skiing only,
except for the adjustable poles that can
be used for downhill skiing and hiking.

SPM 11 EN.indb 85 10/14/10 4:29 PM

 Salomon U.S.A.
2030 Lincoln Ave.
Ogden, UT 84401 U.S.A.
1 (800) 225-6850
www.salomoncertification.com

Salomon Canada Sports

2700 14th Ave Unit 1-4
Markham, On L3R 0J1
www.salomonhookup.ca

SalomonSports.com
Printed in Canada

SPM 11 EN.indb 86 10/14/10 4:29 PM